ELECTRIC 
 WIRING AND LIGHTING 
 
 A HANDBOOK OF APPROVED MODERN METHODS 
 
 OF LIGHTING BY ELECTRICITY, AND OF 
 
 INSTALLING CONDUCTORS FOR THE 
 
 TRANSMISSION AND UTILIZATION 
 
 OF ELECTRICITY FOR POWER, 
 
 LIGHTING, HEATING, 
 
 AND OTHER USES 
 
 Part I ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 By CHARLES E. I^NOX, E. E. 
 
 CONSULTING ELECTRICAL ENGINEER 
 
 Part II ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 By GEORGE E. SHAAD, E. E. 
 
 PROFESSOR OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, UNIVERSITY OF KANSAS 
 
 ILLUSTRATED 
 
 AMERICAN TECHNICAL SOCIETY 
 CHICAGO 
 
 1916 
 
Copyright 1908, 1913 by 
 AMERICAN TECHNICAL SOCIETY 
 
 Copyright Great Britain 
 AH Rights Reserved 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PART I 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Wires run concealed in conduits 1 
 
 Wires run in rigid conduit 1 
 
 Wires run in flexible metal conduit 4 
 
 Wires run in moulding 9 
 
 Fibrous tubing 15 
 
 Wires run exposed on insulators 16 
 
 Two-wire and three-wire systems 20 
 
 Calculation of sizes of conductors 25 
 
 Planning a wiring installation 29 
 
 Wiring methods 29 
 
 Wiring systems 30 
 
 Location of outlets 30 
 
 Location of distributing centers 31 
 
 Branch circuits ."*". 32 
 
 Voltage drop in conductors 34 
 
 Feeders and mains 36 
 
 Testing circuits 36 
 
 Alternating-current circuits 40 
 
 Comparison with direct-current circuits 40 
 
 Skin effect 42 
 
 Mutual induction 42 
 
 Line capacity 43 
 
 Calculation of drop in a. c. lines 44 
 
 Single-phase circuits 48 
 
 Polyphase circuits 53 
 
 346638 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Wiring an office building 54. 
 
 Current supply '. . . 54 
 
 Switchboard 55 
 
 Load ' 55 
 
 Feeders and mains 55 
 
 Wiring plans for eacli floor :..... 56 
 
 Interconnection system 58 
 
 Outlet-boxes, cut-out panels and accessories 63 
 
 Overhead linework 68 
 
 Poles 69 
 
 Pole guying 72 
 
 Corners 75 
 
 Cross arms 75 
 
 Service mains 77 
 
 Lightning arresters 78 
 
 Lamp supports on poles 79 
 
 Underground linework 79 
 
 Iron pipe 80 
 
 Vitrified tile conduit 80 
 
 Laying conduit 82 
 
 Fibre conduit . . 83 
 
 PART II 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 PAGE 
 
 History and development 1 
 
 Classification 2 
 
 Incandescent lamps 2 
 
 Manufacture of carbon filament lamps V 3 
 
 Voltage and candle-power 5 
 
 Efficiency 6 
 
 Selection of lamps 8 
 
 Distribution curves 11 
 
 Gem metallized- filament lamp 12 
 
 Metallic filament lamps 14 
 
 Helion lamp 21 
 
 Nernst lamp 21 
 
 Comparison of different types 25 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Special lamps 27 
 
 Mercury vapor lamp 27 
 
 Moore tube light 29 
 
 Arc lamps 32 
 
 Control mechanisms 33 
 
 Types of 38 
 
 Direct-current arcs 38 
 
 Alternating-current arcs 39 
 
 Flaming arcs 42 
 
 Power distribution systems 46 
 
 Illumination '.,." 53 
 
 Residence lighting 56 
 
 Types of lamps 56 
 
 Illumination calculations . .". 56 
 
 Intensity constants for incandescent lamps. . 59 
 
 Intensity constants for arc lamps 59 
 
 Arrangements of lamps. 55 
 
 Lighting of public halls, offices, etc 64 
 
 Street lighting 67 
 
 Shades and reflectors 72 
 
 Frosted globes 73 
 
 Holophane globes 74 
 
 Opal enclosed globes 76 
 
 Photometry ,. 76 
 
 Light standards .......;.. . . . .- * 76 
 
 Photometers 79 
 
 Lummer-Brodhun 80 
 
 Weber 83 
 
 Portable 85 
 
 Integrating 86 
 
 Incandescent lamp photometry 88 
 
 Arc light photometry 93 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 T~^ LECTEIC lighting virtually started with the invention of the 
 ' J Edison incandescent lamp in 1878, the discovery of this very 
 useful and flexible lighting unit marking an epoch not only in home 
 lighting., but also in the actual development of the electrical industry 
 itself. This invention had been preceded by the invention of the higher 
 powered but less flexible arc lamp, and these two fundamental lighting 
 sources have been the standards of electrical illumination since that 
 time. 
 
 C The last few years have seen many notable improvements,, not only 
 in the methods of lighting but in the light units themselves. The 
 enclosed arc, the flaming arc, the Moore tubes, and the Nernst lamp 
 have all contributed to this wonderful development, but the recent 
 improvement in metallic filament lamps, notably the Tungsten, has 
 given an impetus which is second onty to the original invention of the 
 incandescent lamp itself. To cut the energy consumption per candle- 
 power from 3.5 watts to 1.25 watts is certainly a triumph, and this 
 improvement has opened up many fields of activity hitherto closed to 
 incandescent lighting. It has even made the beautifully effective, but 
 criminally inefficient, method of indirect lighting economically pos- 
 sible. 
 
 C In addition to the progress in the lighting phases of this interesting 
 subject, the many precautions and safeguards which the building 
 departments of our cities and the National Board of Fire Underwriters 
 demand in connection with lighting and power circuits, make it all the 
 
more necessary that everyone actively engaged or interested in lighting 
 and wiring should have a reliable handbook giving standard specifica- 
 tions and requirements as to materials and methods, and adequate 
 descriptions of recommended devices. 
 
 C The material in this volume is especially adapted for purposes of 
 self-instruction and home study. The utmost care has been used to 
 make the treatment of each subject appeal not only to the technically 
 trained expert, but also to the beginner and the self-taught practical 
 man who wishes to keep abreast of modern progress. The language 
 is simple and clear; heavy technical terms and the formulae of the 
 higher mathematics have been avoided, yet without sacrificing any of 
 the requirements of practical instruction. 
 
 C For purposes of ready reference and timely information when 
 needed, it is believed that this handbook will be found to meet every 
 requirement. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 METHODS OF WIRING 
 
 The different methods of wiring which are now approved by the 
 National Board of Fire Underwriters, may be classified under four 
 general heads, as follows: 
 
 1. WIRES RUN CONCEALED IN CONDUITS. 
 
 2. WIRES RUN IN MOULDING. 
 
 3. CONCEALED KNOB AND TUBE WIRING. 
 
 4. WIRES RUN EXPOSED ON INSULATORS. 
 
 WIRES RUN CONCEALED IN CONDUITS 
 
 Under this general head, will be included the following: 
 
 (a) Wires run in rigid conduits. 
 
 (6) Wires run in flexible metal conduits. 
 
 (c) Armored cable. 
 
 Wires Run in Rigid Conduit. The form of rigid metal conduit now 
 used almost exclusively, consists of plain iron gaspipe the interior sur- 
 face of which has been prepared by removing the scale and by remov- 
 ing the irregularities, and which is then coated with flexible enamel. 
 The outside of the pipe is given a thin coat of enamel in some cases, 
 and, in other 
 cases, is galvan- 
 i z e d . Fig. 1 
 shows one make 
 
 11 , Fig. 1. Rigid Enameled Conduit, Unlined. 
 
 OI enameled (nu- Courtesy of American Conduit Mfg. Co., Pittsburg, Pa. 
 
 lined) conduit. 
 
 Another form of rigid conduit is that known as the armored con- 
 duit, which consists of iron pipe with an interior lining of paper 
 impregnated with asphaltum or similar compound. This latter form 
 of conduit is now rapidly going out of use, owing to the unlined pipe 
 being cheaper and easier to install, and owing also to improved methods 
 of protecting the iron pipe from corrosion, and to the introduction of 
 additional braid on the conductors, which partly compensates for the 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 pipe being unlined. The introduction of improved devices such as 
 outlet insulators, for protecting the conductors from the sharp edges of 
 the pipe, at outlets, cut-out cabinets, etc. also decreases the neces- 
 sity of the additional protection afforded by the interior paper lining. 
 
 Rigid Conduits are made in gaspipe sizes, from one-half inch to 
 three inches in diameter. The following table gives the various data 
 relating to rigid, enameled (unlined) conduit: 
 
 TABLE I 
 Rigid, Enameled Conduit Sizes, Dimensions, Etc. 
 
 
 
 NOMINAL 
 
 NUMBER OF 
 
 ACTUAL 
 
 NOMINAL 
 
 STANDARD 
 PIPE SIZE 
 
 THICKNESS 
 
 WEIGHT 
 
 PER 
 
 THREADS 
 PER INCH 
 
 OUTSIDE 
 DIAMETER. 
 
 INSIDE 
 DIAMETER. 
 
 
 
 100 FEET 
 
 OF SCREW 
 
 INCHES 
 
 INCHES 
 
 j 
 
 .109 
 
 84 
 
 14 
 
 .84 
 
 .62 
 
 | 
 
 .113 
 
 112 
 
 14 
 
 1.05 
 
 .82 
 
 1 
 
 .134 
 
 167 
 
 11* 
 
 1.31 
 
 1.04 
 
 H 
 
 .140 
 
 224 
 
 11* 
 
 1.66 
 
 1.38 
 
 i* 
 
 .145 
 
 268 
 
 11* 
 
 1.90 
 
 1.61 
 
 2 
 
 .154 
 
 361 
 
 111 
 
 2.37 
 
 2.06 
 
 2i 
 
 .204 
 
 574 
 
 8 
 
 2.87 
 
 2.46 
 
 3 
 
 .217 
 
 754 
 
 8 
 
 3.50 
 
 3.06 
 
 Tables II, III, and IV give the various sizes of conductors that 
 may be installed in these conduits. Caution must be exercised in 
 
 TABLE II 
 Single Wire in Conduit 
 
 SIZE WIRE, B. & S. G. 
 
 LORICATED CONDUIT, UNLINED; D. B. WIRE 
 
 No. 14-4 
 
 \ inch 
 
 2 
 
 1 ' 
 
 1 
 
 i ' 
 
 
 
 f inch or 1 ' 
 
 00 
 
 1 
 
 000 
 
 1 ' 
 
 0000 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 250,000 C. M. 
 
 H 
 
 ( 
 
 300,000 C. M. 
 
 H 
 
 ( 
 
 350,000 C. M. 
 
 H 
 
 i 
 
 400,000 C. M. 
 
 H " or if 
 
 t 
 
 450.000 C. M. 
 
 l| 
 
 i 
 
 SOOiOOO C. M. 
 
 1* 
 
 i 
 
 600,000 C. M. 
 
 H " or 2 
 
 1 
 
 700,000 C. M. 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 800,000 C. M. 
 
 2 
 
 * 
 
 900,000 C. M. 
 
 2 
 
 t 
 
 1,000,000 C. M. 
 
 2 " or 2 
 
 i . 
 
 1,500,000 C. M. 
 
 2* 
 
 t 
 
 1,700,000 C. M. 
 
 
 ( 
 
 2,000,000 C. M. 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 TABLE III 
 Two Wires in One Conduit 
 
 SIZE WIRE, B. & S. G. 
 
 LORICATED CONDUIT, UNLINED; D. B. WIRE 
 
 No. 14 
 
 \ inch. 
 
 
 12 
 
 \ irch or f 
 
 ' 
 
 
 10 
 
 | 
 
 < 
 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 < 
 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 ' 
 
 
 5 
 
 1 " or \\ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 4 
 
 H 
 
 t 
 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 ( 
 
 
 2 
 
 U " or \\ 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 lj 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 f 
 
 
 00 
 
 H " or 2 
 
 ' 
 
 
 000 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 
 0000 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 250,000 C. M. 
 
 2 " or 2i 
 
 1 
 
 300,000 C. M. 
 
 2i 
 
 t 
 
 350,000 C. M. 
 
 2^ 
 
 i 
 
 400,000 C. M. 
 
 2 " or 3 
 
 i 
 
 450,000 C. M. 
 
 3 
 
 < 
 
 500,000 C. M. 
 
 3 
 
 : 
 
 600,000 C. M. 
 
 3 
 
 t 
 
 700,000 C. M. 
 
 3 
 
 ( 
 
 TABLE IV 
 Three Wires in One Conduit 
 
 SIZE WIRE, B. & S. G. 
 
 LORICATED TUBE, UNLINED; 
 
 Outside 
 
 Center 
 
 D. B. WIRE 
 
 No. 
 
 14 
 
 No. 
 
 12 
 
 f inch 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 1* 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1| inch or 1^ 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 1* 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 2/0 
 
 li " or 2 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 3/0 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4/0 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 2/0 
 
 250 
 
 M. 
 
 2 " or 2J 
 
 
 
 
 3/0 
 
 300 
 
 M. 
 
 2* 
 
 
 
 
 4/0 
 
 400 
 
 M. 
 
 2* 
 
 
 250 
 
 M. 
 
 450 
 
 M. 
 
 2J " or 3 
 
 
 250 
 
 M. 
 
 500 
 
 M. 
 
 3 
 
 
 300 
 
 M. 
 
 600 
 
 M. 
 
 3 
 
 
 350 
 
 M. 
 
 700 
 
 M. 
 
 3 
 
 
 400 
 
 M. 
 
 800 
 
 M. 
 
 3 
 
 
 450 
 
 M. 
 
 900 
 
 M. 
 
 3 
 
 
4 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 using these tables, for the reason that the sizes of conductors which 
 may be safely installed in any run of conduit depend, of course, upon 
 the length of and the number of bends in the run. The tables are 
 based on average conditions where the run does not exceed 90 to 100 
 feet, without more than three or four bends, in the case of the smaller 
 sizes of wires for a given size of conduit ; and where the run does not 
 exceed 40 to 50 feet, with not more than one or two bends, in the case 
 of the larger sizes of wires, for the same sizes of conduit. 
 
 Unlined conduit can be bent without injury to the conduit, if the 
 conduit is properly made and if proper means are used in making the 
 bends. Care should be exercised to avoid flattening the tube as a result 
 of making the bend over a sharp curve or angle. 
 
 In installing iron conduits, the conduits should cross sleepers or 
 beams at right angles, so as to reduce the amount of cutting of the 
 beams or sleepers to a minimum. 
 
 Where a number of conduits originate at a center of distribution, 
 they should be run at right angles for a distance of two or three feet 
 from the cut-out box, in order to obtain a symmetrical and workman- 
 like arrangement of the conduits, and so as to have them enter the 
 cabinet in a neat manner. While it is usual to use red or white lead 
 at the joints of conduits in order to make them water-tight, this is 
 frequently unnecessary in the case of enameled conduit, as there is 
 often sufficient enamel on the thread to make a water-tight joint. 
 
 When iron conduits are installed in ash concrete, in Keene 
 cement, or, in general, where they are subject in any way to corrosive 
 action, they should be coated with asphaltum or other similar protec- 
 tive paint to prevent such action. 
 
 While the cost of circuit work run in iron conduits is usually 
 greater than any other method of wiring, it is the most permanent 
 and durable, and is strongly recommended where the first cost is not 
 th'e sole consideration. This method of wiring should always be 
 used in fireproof buildings, and also in the better class of frame build- 
 ings. It is also to be recommended for exposed work where the work 
 is liable to disturbance or mechanical damage. 
 
 Wires Run in Flexible Metal Conduit. This form of conduit, 
 shown in Fig. 2, is described by the manufacturers as a conduit com- 
 posed of "concave and convex metal strips wound spirally upon each 
 other in such a manner as to interlock several concave surfaces and 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Fig. 2. Flexible Steel Conduit. 
 Courtesy of Sterling Electric Co., Troy, N. 7. 
 
 present their convex surfaces, both exterior and interior, thereby 
 securing a smooth and comparatively frictionless surface inside and 
 out." 
 
 The field for the use of this form of conduit is rapidly increasing. 
 Owing to its flexibility, conduit of this type can be used in numerous 
 cases where the 
 rigid conduit 
 could not possi- 
 bly be em- 
 ployed. Its use 
 is to be recom- 
 mended above 
 
 all the other forms of wiring, except that installed in rigid conduits. 
 For new fireproof buildings, it is not so durable as the rigid conduit, 
 because not so water-tight; and it is very difficult, if not impossible, 
 to obtain as workmanlike a condu't system with the flexible as with the 
 rigid type of conduit. For completed or old frame buildings, however, 
 the use of the flexible conduit is superior to all other forms of wiring. 
 
 Table V gives the inside diameter of various sizes of flexible con- 
 duit, and the lengths of standard coils. inside diameter of this 
 conduit is the same as that of the rigid conduit; and the table given 
 for the maximum sizes of conductors which may be installed in the 
 various sizes of conduits, may be used also for flexible steel conduits, 
 except that a little more margin should be allowed for flexible steel 
 conduits than for the rigid conduits, as the stiffness of the latter makes 
 it possible to pull in slightly larger sized conductors. 
 
 TABLE V 
 Greenfield Flexible Steel Conduit 
 
 INSIDE DIAMETER 
 
 APPROXIMATE FEET IN COIL 
 
 ft inch 
 
 ? 
 
 inches 
 
 200 
 200 
 100 
 
 50 
 
 50 
 
 50 
 
 50 
 Random Lengths 
 
6 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 This conduit should, of course, be first installed without the con- 
 ductors, in the same manner as the rigid conduit. Owing to the 
 flexibility of this conduit, however, it is absolutely essential to fasten 
 it securely at all elbows, bends, or offsets; for, if this is not done, con- 
 siderable difficulty will be ex- 
 perienced in drawing the con- 
 ductors in the conduit. 
 
 The rules governing the in- 
 stallation of this conduit are 
 the same as those covering 
 rigid conduits. Double-braided 
 Fig. 3. use of Elbow ciamp for Fastening Flex- conductors are required, and 
 
 ible Conduit in Place. ' , . . _ _ . / 
 
 the conduit should be grounded 
 
 as required by the Code Rules. As already stated, the conduit should 
 be securely fastened (in not less than three places) at all elbows; or 
 else the special elbow clamp made for this purpose, shown in Fig. 3, 
 .should be used. 
 
 In order to cut flexible steel conduit properly, a fine hack saw 
 should be employed. Outlet -boxes are required at all outlets, as well 
 as bushing and wires to rigid 
 conduit. Fig. 4 shows a coil 
 of flexible steel conduit. Figs. 
 5, 6, and 7 show, respectively, 
 an outlet box and cover, outlet 
 plate, and bushing used for this 
 conduit. 
 
 Armored Cable. There 
 are many cases where it is im- 
 possible to install a conduit 
 system. In such cases, prob- 
 bably the next best results may 
 be obtained by the use of steel 
 armored cable. The rules gov- 
 erning the installation of armored cable are given in the National 
 Electric Code, under Section 24-A, and Section 48 ; also in 24r-S. This 
 cable is shown in Fig. 8. 
 
 Steel armored cable is made by winding formed steel strips over 
 the insulated conductors. The steel strips are similar to those used 
 
 Fig. 4. A 100-Foot Coil of Flexible Steel Conduit. 
 Courtesy of Sprague Electric Co., New York,N.Y. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 7 
 
 for the steel conduit. Care is taken in forming the cable, to avoid 
 crushing or abraiding the insulation on the conductors as the steel 
 
 Fig. 5. Outlet Box for Flexible Steel Conduit. 
 
 strips are fed and formed over the same. In the process of manufac- 
 ture, the spools of steel ribbon are of irregular length, and when a 
 
 Fig. 6. Outlet Plate for Flexible Steel Fig. 7. Outlet Bushing. 
 
 Conduit. Courtesy of SpragueElectric Co.,NewYork, 2V. F. 
 
 spool is empty, the machine is stopped, and the ribbon is started on 
 the next spool, the process being continued. There is no reason why 
 
 Fig. 8. Flexible Armored Cable. Twin Conductors. 
 Courtesy of Sprague Electric Co., New York, N. Y. 
 
 the conduit cables could not be made of any length ; but their actual 
 lengths as made are determined by convenience in handling. Armored 
 
8 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 cable is made in single conductors from No. 1 to No. 10 B. & S. G.; 
 in twin conductors, from No. 6 to No. 14 B. & S. G.; and three-conduc- 
 tor cable, from No. 10 to No. 14 B. & S. G. Table VI gives various 
 data relating to armored conductors: 
 
 TABLE VI 
 Armored Conductors Types, Dimensions, Etc. 
 
 SIZE 
 B.&S 
 
 GAUGE 
 
 TYPE AND NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS 
 
 OUTSIDE 
 DIAMETER 
 
 (INCHES) 
 
 No. 14 
 
 BX twin conductor 
 
 .63 
 
 " 12 
 
 it ti it 
 
 .685 
 
 " 10 
 
 (t (t (t 
 
 .725 
 
 " 8 
 
 ti tt it 
 
 .875 
 
 " 6 
 
 <t it ti 
 
 1.3125 
 
 " 14 
 
 BM twin conductor (for marine work ship wiring) 
 
 .725 
 
 " 12 
 
 a it u 
 
 .725 
 
 " 10 
 
 tt <t tt 
 
 .73 
 
 " 14 
 
 BX3 three conductor 
 
 .71 
 
 " 12 
 
 ti it tt 
 
 .725 
 
 tt 10 
 
 ti tt tt 
 
 .73 
 
 " 14 
 
 BXL twin conductor, leaded 
 
 .725 
 
 " 12 
 
 it tt ti tt 
 
 .725 
 
 " 10 
 
 tt ti tt a 
 
 .87 
 
 " 14 
 
 BXL3 three conductor, leaded 
 
 .90 
 
 " 12 
 
 ti tt tt ti 
 
 .90 
 
 " 10 
 
 tt n tt tt 
 
 .94 
 
 " 10 
 " 8 
 
 Type D single conductor, stranded 
 
 .550 
 .550 
 
 " 6 
 
 it t 
 
 .575 
 
 " 4 
 
 tt i 
 
 .700 
 
 " 2 
 
 tt t 
 
 .900 
 
 " 1 
 
 tt t 
 
 .965 
 
 " 10 
 11 8 
 
 Type DL single conductor, stranded, leaded 
 
 if tt -i (i 
 
 .625 
 .710 
 
 " 6 
 
 it ft t (t 
 
 .700 
 
 4 
 
 tt ti t n 
 
 .760 
 
 " 2 
 
 ti tt tt 
 
 .920 
 
 " 1 
 
 u K t it 
 
 .910 
 
 
 STEEL ARMORED FLEXIBLE CORD 
 
 
 " 18 
 " 16 
 
 Type E twin conductor 
 
 it tt ti ti 
 
 .40 
 .40 
 
 " 14 
 
 ti ft ti it 
 
 .47 
 
 " 18 
 " 16 
 
 Type EM twin conductor, re-inforced 
 
 if ti tt ti tt 
 
 .575 
 
 .585 
 
 " 14 
 
 <t tt tt ti ti 
 
 .595 
 
 In Table VI, Tvpes D (single), BX (twin), and BX3 (3 conduc- 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 9 
 
 tors) are armored cable adapted for ordinary indoor work. Type 
 BM (twin conductors) is adapted for marine wiring. Types DL 
 (single), BXL (twin), and BXL 3 (3 conductors) have the conductors 
 lead -encased, with the steel armor outside, and are especially adapted 
 for damp places, such as breweries, stables, and similar places. 
 
 Type E is used for flexible-cord pendants, and is suitable for 
 factories, mills, show windows, and other similar places. Type EM 
 is the same as Type E; but the flexible cord is reinforced, and is suit- 
 able for marine work,' for use in damp places, and in all cases where it 
 will be subject to very rough handling. 
 
 While this form of wiring has not the advantage of the conduit 
 system namely, that the wires can be withdrawn and new wires 
 inserted without disturbing the building in any way whatever yet it 
 has many of the advantages of the flexible steel conduit, and it has 
 some additional advantages of its own. For example, in a building 
 already erected, this cable can be fished between the floors and in the 
 partition walls, where it would be impossible to install either rigid 
 conduit or flexible steel conduit without disturbing the floors or 
 walls to an extent that would be objectionable. 
 
 Armored conductors should be continuous from outlet to outlet, 
 without being spliced and installed on the loop system. Outlet boxes 
 should be installed at all outlets, although, where this is impossible, 
 outlet plates may be used under certain conditions. Clamps should 
 be provided at all outlets, switch-boxes, junction-boxes, etc., to hold 
 the cable in place, and also to serve as a means of grounding the steel 
 sheathing. 
 
 Armored cable is less expensive than the rigid conduit or the 
 flexible steel conduit, but more expensive than cleat wiring or knob 
 and tube wiring, and is strongly recommended in preference to the 
 latter. 
 
 WIRES RUN IN MOULDING 
 
 Moulding is very extensively used for electric circuit work, in 
 extending circuits in buildings which have already been wired, and 
 also in wiring buildings which were not provided with electric circuit 
 work at the time of their erection. The reason for the popularity of 
 moulding is that it furnishes a convenient and fairly good-looking 
 runway for the wires, and protects them from mechanical injury. 
 
10 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 i 
 
 y T 
 
 *a 
 
 3 
 
 IT 
 
 d co 
 
 CQ J_ 
 
 Ac k Ab 4* Aa4*- Ab *| Ac 
 
 
 A 
 
 Fig. 9. Two- Wire Wood Moulding. 
 
 It seems almost unwise to place conductors carrying electric current, 
 in wood casing; but this method is still permitted by the National 
 Electric Code, although it is not allowed in damp places or in places 
 
 where there is liability to damp- 
 ness, such as on brick walls, 
 in cellars, etc. 
 
 The dangers from the use of 
 moulding are that if the wood 
 becomes soaked with water, 
 there will be a liability to leak- 
 age of current between the conductors run in the grooves of the mould- 
 ing, and to fire being thereby started, which may not be immediately dis- 
 covered. Furthermore, if the conductors are overloaded, and conse- 
 quently overheated, the wood is likely to become charred and finally ig- 
 nited. Moreover, the moulding itself is always a temptation as affording 
 a good "round strip" in which to drive nails, hooks, etc. However, the 
 convenience and popularity of moulding cannot be denied; and until 
 some better substitute is found, or until its use is forbidden by the 
 Rules, it will continue to be used to a very great extent for running 
 circuits outside of the walls and on the ceilings of existing build ings. 
 Figs. 9, 10, 11, and 12 show two- and three-wire moulding respectively; 
 and Table VII gives complete data as to sizes of the moulding required 
 for various sizes of conductors. 
 
 While the Rules recommend the use of hardwood moulding, as a 
 matter of fact probably 90 per cent of the moulding used is of white- 
 wood or other similar cheap, soft wood . Georgia pine or oak ordinarily 
 
 Q 
 
 ^ ^1 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 d 1 
 
 Q i 
 
 Ac- 
 
 Ab 
 
 -Aa- 
 
 -Ab- 
 
 *-Ac^ 
 
 c 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 10. Two-Wire Wood Moulding. 
 
 costs about twice as much as the soft wood. In designing moulding 
 work, if appearance is of importance, the moulding circuits should 
 be laid put so as to afford a symmetrical and complete design. For 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 11 
 
 example, if an outlet is to be located in the center of the ceiling, 
 the moulding should be continued from wall to wall, the portion beyond 
 the outlet, of course, having no conductors inside of the moulding. 
 If four outlets are to be placed on the ceiling, the rectangle of moulding 
 should be completed on the fourth side, although, of course, no con- 
 
 i 
 
 z E 
 
 I 
 
 - 
 Jl ? 
 
 Ac]*-Ab-j-Aa4-Ab j-A 
 
 aT~Ab-*mc 
 
 
 . A 
 
 Fig. 11. Three- Wire Wood Moulding. 
 
 ductors need be placed in this portion of the moulding. Doing this 
 increases the cost but little and adds greatly to the appearance. 
 
 Moulding is frequently used in combination with other methods 
 of wiring, including armored cable, flexible steel tubing, and fibrous 
 tubing. In many instances, it is possible to fish tubing between 
 beams or studs running in a certain direction; but when the conduc- 
 tors are to run in another direction or at right angles to the beams or 
 studs, exposed work is necessary. In such cases, a junction-box or 
 outlet-box must be placed at the point of connection between the 
 moulding and the armored cable or steel tubing. 
 
 Where circuits are run in moulding, and pass through the floor, 
 additional protection must be provided, as required by the Code Rules, 
 
 Q 
 D 
 
 ^ x 
 
 DC 
 
 
 DQ 
 
 |J 
 
 Ac 
 
 Ab-* 
 
 Act 
 
 Ab 
 
 ACL 
 
 Ab- 
 
 -Ac- 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 12. Three-Wire Wood Moulding. 
 
 to protect the moulding. As a rule, it is better to use conduit for all 
 portions of moulding within six feet of the floor, so as to avoid the 
 possibility of injury to the circuits. Where a combination of iron 
 conduit or flexible steel tubing is used with moulding, it is well to use 
 double-braided conductors throughout, because, although only single- 
 
12 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 TABLE VII 
 Sizes of Mouldings Required for Various Sizes of Conductors 
 
 OF 
 DING 
 
 Y 
 
 M 
 
 A-2 
 
 MBER 
 WIRES 
 
 MAXIMUM 
 SIZE OF WIRE 
 BANDS. 
 
 SOLID 
 
 12 
 
 STRANDED 
 
 14 
 
 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES 
 
 AaAb 
 
 Ac 
 
 5 
 
 Ba 
 
 Bb 
 
 32 
 
 DC 
 
 Ca 
 
 A-4 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 _ 
 
 16 
 
 h 
 
 29 
 32 
 
 16 
 
 32 
 
 'fl 
 
 16 
 
 A-6 
 
 It 
 
 A-6 
 
 A-9 
 
 10 
 
 A-IO 
 
 55QOOO 
 C.M. 
 
 16 
 
 10 
 
 A-l 
 
 C.M. 
 
 \i 
 
 . 
 
 16 
 
 1 1 
 
 B-2 
 
 12 
 
 14 
 
 . 
 
 32 
 
 27 
 32 
 
 32 
 
 i 1 
 
 B-4- 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 
 L5 
 32 
 
 . 
 
 16 
 
 16 
 
 29 
 32 
 
 16 
 
 32 
 
 1 I 
 
 B-6 
 
 13 
 32 
 
 1 1 
 
 B-8 
 
 _ 
 32 
 
 16 
 
 9_ 
 
 32 
 
 1 1 
 
 B-9 
 
 3/0 
 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 32 
 
 . 
 32 
 
 9. 
 32 
 
 12 
 
 B-IO 
 
 25QOOO 
 C.M. 
 
 
 23 
 32 
 
 23 
 32 
 
 
 . 
 16 
 
 12 
 
 B-ll 
 
 4-OQOOO 
 C.M. 
 
 16 
 
 braided conductors are required with moulding, double-braided con- 
 ductors are required with unlined conduit, and if double-braided con- 
 ductors were not used throughout, it would be necessary to make a 
 joint at the outlet-box where the moulding stopped and the conduit 
 work commenced. Where the conductors pass through floors, in 
 moulding work, and where iron conduit is used, the inspection authori- 
 ties, in order to protect the wire, usually require that a fibrous tubing 
 be used as additional protection for the conductors inside of the iron 
 pipe, although, if double-braided wire is used, this will not usually be 
 required. Fig. 13 shows a f useless cord rosette for use with moulding 
 work. Fig. 14 shows a device for making a tap in moulding wiring. 
 
 Moulding work, under ordinary conditions, costs about one-half 
 as much as circuit run in rigid conduit, and about 75 per cent, under 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 13 
 
 ordinary conditions, of the cost of armored cable. Where the latter 
 method of wiring or the conduit system can be employed, one or the 
 other of these two methods should be used in preference to moulding, 
 
 
 Fig. 13. Fuseless Cord Fig. 14. Device for Making "Tap" in 
 
 Rosette. Moulding. 
 
 Courtesy of Grouse- TRnds Co., Courtesy of II. T. Paiste CD., 
 
 Syracuse, 'N. Y. Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
 as the work is not only more substantial, but also safer. Various forms 
 of metal moulding have been introduced, but up to the present time 
 have not met with the success which they deserve. 
 
 CONCEALED KNOB AND TUBE WIRING 
 
 This method of wiring is still allowed by the National Electric 
 Code, although many vigorous attempts have been made to have it 
 abolished. Each of these attempts has met with the strongest 
 opposition from contractors and central stations, particularly in small 
 towns and villages, the argument for this method being, that it is the 
 cheapest method of wiring, and that if it were forbidden, many places 
 which are wired according to this method would not be wired at all, 
 and the use of electricity would therefore be much restricted, if not 
 entirely done away with, in such communities. This argument, how- 
 ever, is only a temporary makeshift obstruction in the way of inevitable 
 progress, and in a few years, undoubtedly, the concealed knob and 
 tube method will be forbidden by the National Electric Code. 
 
 The cost of wiring according to this method is about one-third 
 of the cost of circuits run in rigid conduit, and about one-half of the 
 cost of circuits run in armored cable. The latter method of wiring 
 
14 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 is rapidly replacing knob and tube wiring, and justly so, wherever 
 the additional price for the latter method of wiring can be obtained. 
 As the name indicates, this method of wiring employs porcelain knobs 
 
 Fig. 15. Knob and Tube Wiring. 
 
 and tubes, the circuit work being run concealed between the floor beams 
 and studs of a frame building. The knobs are used when the circuits 
 run parallel to the floor beams ; and the porcelain tubes are used when 
 the circuits are run at right angles to the floor beams. 
 
 Fig. 15 shows an example of knob and tube wiring. In concealed 
 knob and tube wiring, the wires must be separated at least five inches 
 from one another, and at least one inch from the surface wired over, 
 that is, from the beams, flooring, etc., to which the insulator is fas- 
 tened. Fig. 16 shows a 
 good type of porcelain 
 knob for this class of 
 wiring. For knob and 
 tube wiring, it will be 
 noted that, owing to the 
 fact that the wiring is 
 concealed, the conductors Fig " 1G Porcelain Knob ' 
 
 must be kept further apart than in the case of exposed or open wiring 
 on insulators, where, except in damp places, the wires may be run on 
 cleats or on insulators only one-half inch from the surface wired ovei, 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 15 
 
 Fibrous Tubing. Fibrous tubing is frequently used with knob 
 and tube wiring, and the regulations governing its use are given in 
 Rule 24, Section S, of the National Electric Code. This tubing, as 
 stated in this Rule, may be used where it is impossible and impracticable 
 to employ knobs and tubes, provided the difference in potential 
 between the wires is not over 300 volts, and if the wires are not sub- 
 
 Fig. 17. Flexible Tubing, "Flexduct" Type. 
 Courtesy of National Metal Molding Co., Pittsburg, Pa. 
 
 ject to moisture. The cost of wiring in flexible fibrous tubing is 
 approximately about the same as the cost of knob and tube wiring. 
 Duplex conductors, or two wires together are not allowed in fibrous 
 tubing. 
 
 Fibrous tubing is required at all outlets where conduit or armored 
 cable is not used (as in knob and tube wiring) ; and, as required by the 
 Rules, it must extend back from the last porcelain support to one inch 
 beyond the outlet. Fig. 17 shows one make of fibrous tubing. 
 
 Table VIII gives the maximum sizes of conductors (double- 
 braided) which may be installed in fibrous conduit. 
 
 TABLE VIII 
 Sizes of Conductors in Fibrous Conduit 
 
 OUTSIDE DIAMETER 
 
 INSIDE DIAMETER 
 
 ONE WIRE IN 
 
 TUBE 
 
 \l inch 
 
 i inch 
 
 No. 12 
 
 
 11 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 " 8 
 
 
 If 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 " 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 " 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 2/0 
 
 
 ii^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 250,000 
 
 C. M. 
 
 i& 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 400,000 
 
 C. M. 
 
 ill 
 
 
 1* 
 
 
 750,000 
 
 C. M. 
 
 
 
 If 
 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 C. M. 
 
 21 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 1,500,000 
 
 C. M. 
 
 2| 
 
 
 2i ' 
 
 
 2,000,000 
 
 C. M. 
 
16 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 WIRES RUN EXPOSED ON INSULATORS 
 
 This method of wiring has the advantages of cheapness, durability, 
 and accessibility. 
 
 Cheapness. The relative cost of this method of wiring as com- 
 pared with that of the concealed conduit system, is about fifty per cent 
 of the latter if rubber-covered conductors are used, and about forty 
 per cent of the latter if weatherproof slow-burning conductors are used. 
 As the Rules of the Fire Underwriters allow the use of weatherproof 
 slow-burning conductors in dry places, considerable saving may be 
 effected by this method of wiring, provided there is no objection to it 
 
 Fig. I& Large Feeders Run Exposed on Insulators. 
 
 from the standpoint of appearance, and also provided that it is not 
 liable to mechanical injury or disarrangement. 
 
 Durability. It Is a well-known fact that rubber insulation has a 
 relatively short life. Inasmuch as in this method of wiring, the insula- 
 tion does not depend upon the insulation of the conductors, but on 
 the insulators themselves, which are of glass or porcelain, this system 
 is much more desirable than any of the other methods. Of course, 
 if the conductors are mechanically injured, or the insulators broken, 
 the insulation of the system is reduced ; but there is no gradual dete- 
 rioration as there is in the c^se of other methods of wiring, where 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 17 
 
 rubber is depended upon for insulation. This is especially true in hot 
 places, particularly where the temperature is 120 F. or above. For 
 such cases, the weatherproof slow-burning conductors on porcelain 
 or glass insulators are especially recommended. 
 
 Accessibility. The conductors being run exposed, they may be 
 readily repaired or removed, or connections may be made to the same. 
 
 This method of 
 wiring is especially 
 recommended for 
 mills, factories, and 
 for large or long 
 feeder conductors. 
 Fig. 18 shows ex- 
 amples of exposed 
 large feeder con- 
 ductors, installed in the New York Life Insurance Building, New 
 York City. For small conductors, up to say No. 6 B. & S. 
 G-auge each, porcelain cleats may be used to support one, two, 
 or three conductors, provided the distance between the conduc- 
 
 Fig. 19. Two- Wire Cleat. 
 
 Fig. 20. One- Wire Cleat. 
 
 Fig. 21. Porcelain Insulator for 
 Large Conductors. 
 
 tors is at least 2J inches in a two-wire system, and 2J inches 
 between the two outside conductors in a three-wire system where the 
 potential between the outside conductors is not over 300 volts. The 
 cleat must hold the wire at least one-half inch from the surface to which 
 the cleat is fastened; and in damp places the wire must be held at 
 least one inch from the surface wired over. For larger conductors, 
 
18 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 from No. 6 to No. 4/ OB. & S. Gauge, it is usual to use single porcelain 
 cleats or knobs. Figs. 19 and 20 show a good form of two-wire 
 
 Fig. 22. Iron Rack and Insulators for Large Conductors. 
 Courtesy of General Electric Co., Schenectady, N. Y. 
 
 cleat and single-wire cleat, respectively. 
 
 For large feeder or main conductors 
 from No. 4/0 B. & S. Gauge upward, a 
 more substantial form of porcelain insu- 
 lafoi should be used, such as shown in 
 Fig. 21. These insulators are held in 
 iron racks or angle-iron frames, of which 
 two forms are shown in Figs. 22 and 23. 
 The latter form of rack is particularly de- 
 sirable for heavy conductors and where a 
 number of conductors are run together. 
 In this form of rack, any length of con- 
 ductor can be removed without disturb- 
 ing the other conductors. 
 
 As a rule, the porcelain insulators 
 should be placed not more than 4J feet 
 apart; and if the wires are liable tc be 
 disturbed, the distance between supports 
 should be shortened, particularly for small 
 conductors. If the beams are so far 
 apart that supports cannot be obtained 
 every 4J feet, it is necessary to provide a 
 running board as shown in Fig. 24, to 
 which the porcelain cleats and knobs 
 can be fastened. Figs. 25 and 26 show 
 two methods of supporting small con- 
 ductors, For conductors of No. 8 B. & S. 
 
 Fig. 23. Elevation and Plan of 
 Insulators Held in Angle- 
 Iron Frames. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 19 
 
 Gauge, or over, it is not necessary to break around the beams, provided 
 they are not liable to be disturbed ; but the supports may be placed on 
 each beam. 
 
 Where the dis- 
 tance between the 
 supports, however, 
 is greater than 4J 
 feet, it is usually 
 necessary to provide 
 
 intermediate SUp- 
 
 ports, as shown in 
 
 Fig. 27, or else to provide a running-board. Another method which 
 
 may be used, where beams are further than 4J feet apart, is to 
 
 pi gt2 4. insulators MOUK ted on Running-Board across Wide- 
 
 Spacec 
 
 Fig. 25. Method of Supporting Small Conductors. 
 
 
 (B 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 \\f 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 _N- .._ , n 
 
 -i_ _ y. . 
 
 Fig. 27. Intermediate Support for Conductor between Wide-Spaced Beams. 
 
 run a main along the wall at right angles to the beams, and to 
 have the individual circuits run between and parallel to the beams. 
 
 nm 
 
 y 
 
 " 
 
 y. 
 
 *-* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 26. Method of Supporting a Small 
 Conductor. 
 
 Fig. 28. Conductors Protected by Wooden 
 Guard-Strips on Low Ceiling. 
 
 In low-ceiling rooms, where the conductors are liable to injury, 
 it is usually required that a wooden guard strip be placed on each side 
 of the conductors, as shown in Fig. 28. 
 
 Where the conductors pass through partitions or walls, they must 
 
20 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 be protected by porcelain tubes, or, if the conductors be of rubber, by 
 means of fibrous tubing placed inside of iron conduits. 
 
 All conductors on the walls for a height of not less than six feet 
 from the ground, either should be boxed in, or, if they be rubber-covered, 
 should (preferably) be run in iron conduits; and in conductors having 
 single braid only, additional protection should be provided by means of 
 flexible tubing placed inside of the iron conduit. 
 
 Where conductors cross each other, or where they cross iron pipes, 
 they should be protected by means of porcelain tubes fastened with 
 tape or in some other substantial manner that, will prevent the tubes 
 from slipping out of place. 
 
 TWO=WIRE AND THREE=WIRE SYSTEMS 
 
 As both the two-wire and the three-wire system are extensively 
 used in electric wiring, it will be well to give some consideration to the 
 advantages and disadvantages of each system, and to explain them 
 somewhat in detail. 
 
 Relative Advantages. The choice of either a two-wire or a three- 
 wire system depends largely upon the source of supply. If, for ex- 
 ample, the source of supply will always probably be a 120-volt, two 
 wire system, there would be no object in installing a three-wire system 
 for the wiring. If, on the other hand, the source of supply is a 120- 
 240-volt system, the wiring should, of course, be made three-wire. 
 Furthermore, if at the outset the supply were two-wire, but with a pos- 
 sibility of a three-wire system being provided later, it would be well 
 to adapt the electric wiring for the three-wire system, making the 
 neutral conductor twice as large as either of the outside conductors, 
 and combining the two outside conductors to make a single conductor 
 until such time as the three-wire service is installed. Of course, there 
 would be no saving of copper in this last-mentioned three-wire system, 
 and in fact it would be slightly more expensive than a two-wire system, 
 as will be shortly explained. 
 
 The object of the three-wire system is to reduce the amount of 
 copper and consequently the cost of wiring necessary to transmit a 
 given amount of electric power. As a rule, the proposition is usually 
 one of lighting and not of power, for the reason that by means of the 
 three-wire system we are able to increase the potential at which the 
 current is transmitted, and at the same time to take advantage of the 
 
FT? 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 21 
 
 greater efficiency of the lower voltage lamp. If current for power 
 (motors, etc.) only were to be transmitted, it would be a simple matter 
 to wind the motors, etc., for a higher voltage, and thereby reduce the 
 weight of copper. 
 If, however, we in- 
 crease the voltage 
 of lamps, we find 
 that they are not so 
 efficient, nor is their 
 
 life SO long. With F *&' 39 Three-Wire System, with Neutral Conductor between 
 
 the Two Outside Conductors. 
 
 the standard carbon 
 
 lamp, it has been found that the 240-volt lamp, with the same 
 life, requires about 10 to 12 per cent more current than the cor- 
 responding 120-volt lamp. Furthermore, in the case of the more 
 efficient lamps recently introduced (such as the Tantalum lamp, 
 Tungsten lamp, etc.), it has been found impracticable, if not impos- 
 sible, to make them for pressures above 125 volts. For this reason 
 the three-wire system is employed, for by this method we can use 240 
 volts across the outside conductors, and by the use of a neutral con- 
 ductor obtain 120 volts between the neutral and the outside conductor, 
 and thereby be enabled to use 120-volt lamps. Furthermore, if a 
 240-volt lamp should ever be placed on the market that was as economi- 
 cal as the lower voltage lamp, the result would be that the 240-480- 
 volt system would be introduced, and 240-volt lamps used. As a 
 
 -. matter of fact, this 
 has been tried in 
 several cities and 
 particularly in 
 Providence, Rhode 
 ^ Island. As a rule, 
 
 Fig. 30. Lamps Arranged in Pairs in Series, Dispensing with however the 1 20- 
 
 Necessity for Third or Neutral Conductor. 
 
 volt lamp has been 
 
 found so much more satisfactory as regards life, efficiency, etc., that 
 it is nearly always employed. 
 
 The two-wire system is so extremely simple that no explanation 
 whatever is required concerning it. 
 
 The three-wire system, however, is somewhat confusing, ana 
 will now be considered. 
 
22 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Details of Three-Wire System. The three-wire system may be 
 considered as a two-wire system with a third or neutral conductor 
 placed between the two outside conductors, as shown in Fig. 29. 
 This neutral conductor would not be required if we could always have 
 the lamps arranged in pairs, as shown in Fig. 30. In this case, the 
 two lamps would burn in series, and we could transmit the current 
 at double the usual voltage, and thereby supply twice the number of 
 lamps with one-quarter the weight of copper, allowing the same loss 
 in pressure in the lamps. The reason for this is, that, having the 
 lamps arranged in series of pairs, we reduce the current to one-half, 
 and, as the pressure at which the current Is transmitted is doubled, 
 we can again reduce the copper one-half without increasing the loss 
 in lamps. We therefore see that we have a double saving, as the cur- 
 rent is reduced one-half, which reduces the weight of copper one-half, 
 and we can again reduce the copper one-half by doubling the loss in 
 volts without increasing the percentage loss. For example,' if in one 
 case we had a straight two-wire system transmitting current to 100 
 lamps at a potential of 100 volts, and this system were replaced by one 
 in which the lamps were placed in series of pairs, as shown in Fig. 30, 
 and the potential increased to 200 volts 100 lamps still being used 
 we should find, in the latter case, that we were carrying current really 
 for only 50 lamps, as we would require only the same amount of cur- 
 rent for two lamps now that we required for one lamp before. Fur- 
 thermore, as the potential would now be 200 instead of 100 volts, 
 we could allow twice as much loss as in the first case, because the loss 
 would now be figured as a percentage of 200 volts instead of a percent- 
 age of 100 volts. From this, it will readily be seen that in the second 
 case mentioned, we would require only one-quarter the weight of 
 copper that would be required in the first case. 
 
 It will readily be seen, however, fchat a system such as that out- 
 lined in the second scheme having two lamps, would be impracticable 
 for ordinary purposes, for the reason that it would always require the 
 lamps to be burned in pairs. Now, it is for this very reason that the 
 third or neutral conductor is required ; and, if this conductor be added, 
 it will no longer be necessary to burn the lamps in pairs. This, then, 
 is the object of the three-wire system to enable us to reduce the 
 amount of copper required for transmitting current, without increasing 
 the electric pressure employed for the lamps. 
 
w 
 
 g* 
 
 
 
 on 
 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 23 
 
 With regard to the size of the neutral conductor, one important 
 point must be borne in mind ; and that is, that the Rules of the National 
 Electric Code require the neutral conductor in all interior wiring to be 
 made at least as large as either of the two outside conductors. The 
 reasons for this from a fire standpoint are obvious, because, if for 
 any reason either of the outside conductors became disconnected, the 
 neutral wire might be required to carry the same current as the out- 
 side conductors, and therefore it should be of the same capacity. Of 
 course, the chances of such an event happening are slight; but, as 
 the fire hazard is all-important, this rule must be complied with for 
 interior wiring or in all cases where there would be a probability of 
 fire. For outside or underground work, however, where the fire 
 hazard would be relatively unimportant, the neutral conductor might 
 be reduced in size; and, as a matter of fact, it is made smaller than 
 the outside conductors. 
 
 The three-wire system is sometimes installed where it is desired 
 to use the system as a two-wire, 125-volt system, or to have it arranged 
 so that it may be used at any time also as a three-wire, 125-250-volt 
 system. Of course, in order to do this, it is necessary to make the 
 neutral conductor equal to the combined capacity of the outside con- 
 ductors, the latter being then connected together to form one con- 
 ductor, the neutral being the return conductor. This system is not 
 recommended except in such instances, for example, as where an 
 isolated plant of 125 volts is installed, and where there is a possibility 
 of changing over at some future time to the three-wire, 125-250-volt 
 system. In such a case as this, however, it would be better, where 
 possible, to design the isolated plant for a three-wire, 125-250-volt 
 system originally, and then to make the neutral conductor the same 
 size as each of the two outside conductors. 
 
 The weight of copper required in a three-wire system where the 
 neutral conductor is the same size as either of the two outside conduct- 
 ors, is f of that required for a corresponding two-wire system using 
 the same voltage of lamps.* It is obvious that this is true, because, 
 
 *NOTE. If, in the two-wire system, we represent the weight of each of the two con- 
 ductors by i, the weight of each of the outside conductors in a three-wire system would 
 be represented by ; and if we had three conductors of the same size, we would have 
 i + i + i^fof the weight of copper required in a three-wire system, which would be 
 required in a corresponding two-wire system having the same percentage of loss and 
 using the same voltage of lamps. 
 
 If the neutral conductor were made \ of the size of each of the outside conductors, 
 as is sometimes done in underground work, the total weight of copper required would be 
 i ^ i f T'S = A of that required in the corresponding two- wire system. 
 
24 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 as the discussion proved concerning the arrangement shown in Fig. 
 30, where the lamps were placed in series of pairs, we found that the 
 weight of copper for the two conductors was one-quarter the weight 
 of the regular two-wire system. It is then of course true, that, if we 
 had another conductor of the same size as each of the outside conduct- 
 ors, we increase theweight of copper one-half, or one-quarter plus 
 one-half of one-quarter that is, three-eighths. 
 
 In the three-wire system frequently used in isolated plants in 
 which the two outside conductors are joined together and the neutral 
 conductor made equal to their combined capacity, there is no saving 
 of copper, for the reason that the same voltage of transmission is used, 
 and, consequently, we have neither reduced the current nor increased 
 the potential. Furthermore, though the weight of copper is the same, 
 it is now divided into three conductors, instead of two, and naturally 
 it costs relatively more to insulate and manufacture three conductors 
 than to insulate and manufacture two conductors having the same 
 total weight of copper. As a matter of fact, the three-wire system, 
 having the neutral conductor equal to the combined capacity of the 
 two outside ones, the latter being joined together, is about 8 to 10 
 per cent more expensive than the corresponding straight two-wire 
 system. 
 
 In interior wiring, as a rule, where the three-wire system is used 
 for the mains and feeders, the two-wire system is nearly always em- 
 ployed for the branch circuits. Of course, the two-wire branch cir- 
 cuits are then balanced on each side of the three-wire system, so as to 
 obtain as far as possible at all times an equal balance on the two sides 
 of the system. This is done so as to have the neutral conductor carry 
 as little current as possible. From what has already been said, it is 
 obvious that in case there is a perfect balance, the lamps are virtually 
 in series of pairs, and the neutral conductor does not carry any current. 
 Where there is an unbalanced condition, the neutral conductor carries 
 the difference between the current on one side and the current on the 
 other side of the system. For example, if we had five lamps on one 
 side of the system and ten lamps on the other, the neutral conductor 
 would carry the current corresponding to five lamps. 
 
 In calculating the three-wire system, the neutral conductor is 
 disregarded, the outer wires being treated as a two-wire circuit, and 
 the calculation is for one-half the total number of lamps, the per- 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 25 
 
 centage of loss being based on the potential across the two outside 
 
 conductors. 
 
 
 
 The three-wire system is very generally employed in alternating- 
 current secondary wiring, as nearly all transformers are built with 
 three-wire connections. 
 
 While unbalancing will not affect the total loss in the outside 
 conductors, yet it does affect the loss in the lamps, for the reason that 
 the system is usually calculated on the basis of a perfect balance, and 
 the loss is divided equally between the two lamps (the latter being 
 considered in series of pairs). If, however, there is unbalancing to 
 a great degree, the loss in lamps will be increased ; and if the entire 
 load is thrown over on one side, the loss in the lamps will be doubled 
 on the remaining side, because the total loss in voltage will now occur 
 in these lamps, whereas, in the case of perfect balance, it would be 
 equally divided between the two groups of lamps. 
 
 CALCULATION OF SIZES OF CONDUCTORS 
 
 The formula for calculating the sizes of conductors for direct 
 currents, where the length, load, and loss in volts are given, is as fol- 
 lows: 
 
 The size of conductor (in circular mils) is equal to the current multiplied 
 by the distance (one way), multiplied by 21.6, divided by the loss in volts; or, 
 
 CM = C X F X 21 - 6 (I) 
 
 in which C = Current, in amperes; 
 
 D Distance or length of the circuit (one way, in feet) ; 
 
 V = Loss in volts between the beginning and end of the circuit. 
 
 The constant (21.6) of this formula is derived from the resistance 
 of a mil foot of wire of 98 per cent conductivity at 25 Centigrade or 
 77 Fahrenheit. The resistance of a conductor of one mil diam- 
 eter and one foot long, is 10.8 at the temperature and conduc- 
 tivity named. We multiply this figure (10.8) by 2, as the length of a 
 circuit is usually given as the distance one way, and in order to obtain 
 the resistance of both conductors in a two-wire circuit, we must 
 multiply by 2. The formula as above given, therefore, is for a two- 
 wire circuit; and in calculating the size of conductors in a three-wire 
 system, the calculation should be made on a two- wire basis, as ex- 
 plained hereinafter. 
 
26 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Formula 1 can be transformed so as to obtain the loss in a given 
 circuit, or the current which may be carried a given distance with a 
 stated loss, or to obtain the distance when the other factors are given, 
 in the following manner: 
 
 Formula for Calculating Loss in Circuit when Size, Current, and Distance are Giver, 
 77 _ C X DX 21.6 f ^^ 
 
 CM ...... (*) 
 
 Formula for Calculating Current which may be Carried by a Given Circuit of Specified 
 Length, and with a Specified Loss 
 
 CMXV 
 
 D X 21.6 
 
 Formula for Calculating Length of Circuit when Size, Loss, and Current to be Carried 
 
 are Given 
 
 CM X V /A \ 
 
 D = ex 21.6 ( 4 ) 
 
 Formulae are frequently given for calculating sizes of conductors, 
 etc., where the load, instead of being given in amperes, is stated in 
 lamps or in horse-power. It is usually advisable, however, to reduce 
 the load to amperes, as the efficiency of lamps and motors is a variable 
 quantity, and the current varies correspondingly. 
 
 It is sometimes convenient, however, to make the calculation 
 in terms of watts. It will readily be seen that we can obtain a formula 
 expressed in watts from Formula 1. To do this, it is advisable to 
 express the loss in volts in percentage, instead of actual volts lost. It 
 must be remembered that, in the above formulae, V represents the 
 volts lost in the circuit, or, in other words, the difference in potential 
 between the beginning and the end of the circuit, and is not the 
 applied E. M. F. The loss in percentage, in any circuit, is equal to 
 the actual loss expressed in volts, divided by the line voltage, multiplied 
 by 100; or, 
 
 P = -Q- X 100. 
 From this equation, we have: 
 
 100 
 
 If, for example, the calculation is to be made on a loss of 5 per cent, 
 with an applied voltage of 250, using this last equation, we would have: 
 
 5 X 250 
 V = -QQ- = 12.5 volts. 
 
 P F 
 Substituting the equation V= -y^r- in Formula 1 , we have: 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 27 
 
 n ,, C X D X 21.6 
 
 
 100 
 
 C X D X 21.6 X 100 
 PE 
 
 C X D X 2,160 
 P E 
 
 This equation it should be remembered, is expressed in terms of 
 applied voltage. Now, since the power in watts is equal to the applied 
 voltage multiplied by the current (W = EC), it follows that 
 
 C--- 
 E 
 
 By substituting this value of C in the equation given above ( C M 
 
 C X D X 2 160\ 
 
 * - | , the formula is expressed in terms of watts instead 
 r L / 
 
 of current, thus: 
 
 CM= ^ V/-. ............ (5) 
 
 in which W = Power in watts transmitted; 
 
 D = Length of the circuit (one way) that is, the length of one 
 
 conductor; 
 
 P = Figure representing the percentage loss; 
 E*= Applied voltage. 
 
 All the above formulae are for calculations of two-wire circuits. 
 In making calculations for three-wire circuits, it is usual to make the 
 calculation on the basis of the two outside conductors; and in three 
 wire calculations, the above formulae can be used with a slight modifi- 
 cation, as will be shown. 
 
 In a three-wire circuit, it is usually assumed in making the cal- 
 culation, that the load is equally balanced on the two sides of the 
 neutral conductor; and, as the potential across the outside conductors 
 is double that of the corresponding potential across a two- wire circuit, 
 it is evident that for the same size of conductor the total loss in volts 
 could be doubled without increasing the percentage of loss in lamps. 
 Furthermore, as the load on one side of the neutral conductor, when 
 the system is balanced, is virtually in series with the load on the 
 third side, the current in amperes is usually one-half the sum of the 
 current required by all the lamps. If C be still taken as the total 
 
 *NOTE. Remember that V in Formulae 1 to 4 represents the volts lost, but that 
 E in Formula 5 represents the applied voltage. 
 
28 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 current in amperes (that is, the sum of the current required by all of 
 the lamps) in Formula 1, we shall have to divide this current by 2, 
 to use the formula for calculating the two outside conductors for a 
 three-wire system. Furthermore, we shall have to multiply the 
 voltage lost in the lamps by 2, to obtain the voltage lost in the two out- 
 side conductors, for the reason that the potential of the outside con* 
 ductors is double the potential required by the lamps themselves. 
 In other words, Formula 1 will become: 
 
 CX DX 21.6 
 
 CM 
 
 2 X V X 2 
 CX DX 21.6 
 
 in which C = Sum of current required by all of the lamps on both sides of 
 
 the neutral conductor; 
 
 D = Length of circuit that is, of any one of the three conductors; 
 V = Loss allowed in the lamps, i, e., one-half the total loss in the 
 two outside conductors. 
 
 In the same manner, all of the other formulse may be adapted for 
 making calculations for three-wire systems. Of course the calcula- 
 tion of a three-wire system could be made as if it were a two-wire 
 system, by taking one-half the total number of lamps supplied, at 
 one-half the voltage between the outside conductors. 
 
 It is understood, of course, that the size of the conductor in 
 Formula 6 is the size of each of the two outs'de ones; but, inasmuch 
 as the Rules of the National Electric Code require that for interior 
 wiring the neutral conductor shall be at least equal in size to the outside 
 conductors, it is not necessary to calculate the size of the neutral 
 conductor. It must be remembered, however, that, in a three-wire 
 system where the neutral conductor is made equal in capacity to the 
 combined size of the two outside conductors, and where the two 
 outside conductors are joined together, we have virtually a two-wire 
 system arranged so that it can be converted into a three- wire system 
 later. In this case the calculation is exactly the same as in the case 
 of the two-wire circuits, except that one of the two conductors is split 
 into two smaller wires of the same capacity. This is frequently done 
 where isolated plants are installed, and where the generators are wound 
 for 125 volts and it may be desired at times to take current from an 
 outside three-wire 125-250-volt system. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 29 
 
 METHOD OF PLANNING A WIRING 
 INSTALLATION 
 
 The first step in planning a wiring installation, is to gather all 
 the data which will affect either directly or indirectly the system of 
 wiring and the manner in which the conductors are to be installed. 
 These data will include: Kind of building; construction of building; 
 space available for conductors; source and system of electric-current 
 supply; and all details which will determine the method of wiring 
 lo be employed. These last items materially affect the cost of the 
 work, and are usually determined by the character of the building 
 and by commercial considerations. 
 
 Method of Wiring. In a modern fireproof building, the only 
 system of wiring to be recommended is that in which the conductors 
 are installed in rigid conduits; although, even in such cases, it may be 
 desirable, and economy may be effected thereby, to install the larger 
 feeder and main conductors exposed on insulators using weatherproof 
 slow-burning wire. This latter method should be used, however, 
 only where there is a convenient runway for the conductors, so that 
 they will not be crowded and will not cross pipes, ducts, etc., and 
 also will not have too many bends. Also, the local inspection authori- 
 ties should be consulted before usin^ this method. 
 
 For mills, factories, etc., wires exposed on cleats or insulators 
 are usually to be recommended, although rigid conduit, flexible con- 
 duit, or armored cable may be desirable. 
 
 In finished buildings, and for extensions of existing outlets, 
 where the wiring could not readily or conveniently be concealed, 
 moulding is generally used, particularly where cleat wiring or other 
 exposed methods of wiring would be objectionable. However, as 
 has already been said, moulding should not be employed where there 
 is any liability to dampness. 
 
 In finished buildings, particularly where they are of frame con- 
 struction, flexible steel conduits or armored cable are to be recom- 
 mended. 
 
 While in new buildings of frame construction, knob and tube 
 wiring are frequently employed, this method should be used only 
 where the question of first cost is of prime importance. While armored 
 cable will cost approximately 50 to 100 per cent more than knob and 
 
30 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 tube wiring, the former method is so much more permanent and is 
 so much safer that it is strongly recommended. 
 
 Systems of Wiring. The system of wiring that is, whether 
 the two-wire or the three-wire system shall be used is usually deter- 
 mined by the source of supply. If the source of supply is an isolated 
 plant, with simple two-wire generators, and with little possibility 
 of current being taken from the outside at some future time, the 
 wiring in the building should be laid out on the two-wire system. If, 
 on the other hand, the isolated plant is three-wire (having three-wire 
 generators, or two-wire generators with balancer sets), or if the cur- 
 rent is taken from an outside source, the wiring in the building should 
 be laid out on a three-wire system. 
 
 It very seldom happens that current supply from a central station 
 is arranged with other than the three-wire system inside of buildings, 
 because, if the outside supply is alternating current, the transformers 
 are usually adapted for a three-wire system. For small buildings, 
 on the other hand, where there are only a few lights and where there 
 would be only one feeder, the two-wire system is used. As a rule, 
 however, when the current is taken from an outside source, it is best 
 to consult the engineer of the central station supplying the current, 
 and to conform with his wishes. As a matter of fact, this should be 
 done in any event, in order to ascertain the proper voltage for the 
 lamps and for the motors, and also to ascertain whether the central 
 station will supply transformers, meters, and lamps for, if these 
 are not thus supplied, they should be included in the contract for the 
 wiring. 
 
 Location of Outlets. It is not within the scope of this treatise 
 to discuss the matter of illumination, but it is desirable, at this point, 
 to outline briefly the method of procedure. 
 
 A set of plans, including elevation and details, if any, and show- 
 ing decorative treatment of the various rooms, should be obtained 
 from the Architect. A careful study should then be made by the 
 Architect, the Owner, and the Engineer, or some other person qualified 
 to make recommendations as to illumination. The location of the 
 outlets will depend: First, upon the decorative treatment of the 
 room, which determines the aesthetic and architectural effects; second* 
 upon the type and general form of fixtures to be used, which should 
 be previously decided on; third, upon the tastes of the owners or 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 31 
 
 occupants in regard to illumination in general, as it is found that 
 tastes vary widely in regard to amount and kind of illumination. 
 
 The location of the outlets,' and the number of lights required 
 at each, having been determined, the outlets should be marked on 
 the plans. 
 
 The Architect should then be consulted as to the location of the 
 centers of distribution, the available points for the risers or feeders, 
 and the available space for the branch circuit conductors. 
 
 In regard to the rising points for the feeders and mains, the fol- 
 lowing precautions should be used in selecting chases : 
 
 1. The space should be amply large to accommodate all the feeders and 
 mains likely to rise at that given point. This seems trite and unnecessary, 
 but it is the most usual trouble with chases for risers. Formerly architects 
 and builders paid little attention to the requirements for chases for electrical 
 work; but in these later days of 2-inch and 2^-inch conduit, they realize that 
 these pipes are not so invisible and mysterious as the force they serve to dis- 
 tribute, particularly when twenty or more such conduits must be stowed away 
 in a building where no special provision has been made for them. 
 
 2. If possible, the space should be devoted solely to electric wiring. 
 Steam pipes are objectionable on account of their temperature; and these and 
 all other pipes are objectionable in the same space occupied by the electrical 
 conduits, for if the space proves too small, the electric conduits are the first to 
 be crowded out. 
 
 The chase, if possible, should be continuous from the cellar to the roof, 
 or as far as needed. This is necessary in order to avoid unnecessary bends or 
 elbows, which are objectionable for many reasons. 
 
 In similar manner, the location of cut-out cabinets or distributing 
 centers should fulfil the following requirements: 
 
 1. They should be accessible at all times. 
 
 2. They should be placed sufficiently close together to prevent the cir- 
 cuits from being too long. 
 
 3. Do not place them in too prominent a position, as that is objectionable 
 from the Architect's point of view. 
 
 4. They should be placed as near as possible to the rising chases, in 
 order to shorten the feeders and mains supplying them. 
 
 Having determined the system and method of wiring, the location 
 of outlets and distributing centers, the next step is to lay out the branch 
 circuits supplying the various outlets. 
 
 Before starting to lay out the branch circuits, a drawing showing 
 the floor construction, and showing the space between the top of the 
 beams and girders and the flooring, should be obtained from the Archi- 
 tect. In f "-proof buildings of iron or steel construction, it is almost 
 the invariable practice, where the work is to be concealed, to run *he 
 
32 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 conduits ove* the beams, under the rough flooring, carrying them 
 between the sleepers when running parallel to the sleepers, and notch- 
 ing the latter when the conduits run across them (see Fig. 31). In 
 wooden frame buildings, the conduits run parallel to the beams and 
 to the furring (see Fig. 32); they are also sometimes run below the 
 
 Finished Floorv 
 
 Fig. 31. Running Conductors Concealed under Floor in Fireproof Building. 
 
 beams. In the latter case the beams have to be notched, and this is 
 allowable only in certain places, usually near the points where the 
 beams are supported. The Architect's drawing is therefore necessary 
 in order that the location and course of the conduits may be indicated 
 on the plans. 
 
 The first consideration in laying out the branch circuit is the 
 number of outlets and number of lights to be wired on any one branch 
 circuit. The Rules of the National Electric Code (Rule 21-D) require 
 that "no set of incandescent lamps requiring more than 660 watts, 
 whether grouped on one fixture or on several fixtures or pendants, 
 will be dependent on one cut-out." While it would be possible to 
 have branch circuits supplying more than 660 watts, by placing various 
 cut-outs at different points along the route of the branch circuit, so 
 as to subdivide it into small sections to comply with the rule, this 
 method is not recommended, except in certain cases, for exposed wiring 
 in factories or mills. As a rule, the proper method is to have the 
 cut-outs located at the center of distribution, and to limit each branch 
 circuit to 660 watts, which corresponds to twelve or thirteen 50-watt 
 lamps, twelve being the usual limit. Attention is called to the fact 
 that the inspectors usually allow 50 watts for each socket connected 
 to a branch circuit; and although 8-candle-power lamps may be 
 placed at some of the outlets, the inspectors hold that the standard 
 lamp is approximately 50 watts, and for that reason th^T? is always 
 the likelihood of a lamp of that capacity being used, and their mspec- 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 33 
 
 tion is based on that assumption. Therefore, to comply with the 
 requirements, an allowance of not more than twelve lamps per branch 
 circuit should be made. 
 
 In ordinary practice, however, it is best to reduce this number 
 still further, so as to make allowance for future extensions or to increase 
 the number of lamps that may be placed at any outlet. For this 
 reason, it is wise to keep the number of the outlets on a circuit at the 
 lowest point consistent with economical wiring. It has been proven 
 by actual practice, that the best results are obtained by limiting the 
 number to five or six outlets on a branch circuit. Of course, where 
 all the outlets have a single light each, it is frequently necessary, for 
 reasons of economy, to increase this number to eight, ten, and, in 
 some cases, twelve outlets. 
 
 We have already referred to the location of the wires or conduits. 
 This question is generally settled by the peculiarities of the construc- 
 tion of the building. It is necessary to know this, however, before 
 laying out the circuit work, as it frequently determines the course of 
 a circuit. 
 
 Now, as to the course of the circuit work, little need be said, 
 as it is largely influenced by the relative position of the outlets, cut- 
 
 Stud or 
 Wall 
 
 Wooden Beam 
 Furring Strips 
 
 Rough Flooring" 
 /Con du.1 t 
 
 Stud or 
 Wall 
 
 Fig. 32. Running Conductors Concealed under Floor in Wooden Frame Building. 
 
 outs, switches, etc. Between the cut-out box and the first outlet, and 
 between the outlets, it will have to be decided, however, whether 
 the circuits shall run at right angles to the walls of the building or 
 room, or whether they shall run direct from one point to another, 
 irrespective of the angle they make to the sleepers or beams. Of 
 course, in the latter case, the advantages are that the cost is some- 
 what less and the number of elbows and bends is reduced. If the 
 
34 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 tubes are bent, however, instead of using elbows, the difference in 
 cost is usually very slight, and probably does not compensate for the 
 disadvantages that would result from running the tubes diagonally. 
 As to the number of bends, if branch circuit work is properly laid 
 out and installed, and a proper size of tube used, it rarely happens 
 that there is any difference in "pulling" the branch circuit wires. 
 It may happen, in the event of a very long run or one having a large 
 number of bends, that it might be advisable to adopt a short and 
 most direct route. 
 
 Up to this time, the location of the distribution centers has been 
 made solely with reference to architectural considerations; but they 
 must now be considered in conjunction with the branch circuit work. 
 
 It frequently happens that, after running the branch circuits 
 on the plans, we find, in certain cases, that the position of centers of 
 distribution may be changed to advantage, or sometimes certain 
 groups may be dispensed with entirely and the circuits run to other 
 points. We now see the wisdom of ascertaining from the Architect 
 where cut-out groups may be located, rather than selecting particular 
 points for their location. 
 
 As a rule, wherever possible, it is wise to limit the length of each 
 branch circuit to 100 feet; and the number and location of the dis- 
 tributing centers should be determined accordingly. 
 
 It may be found that it is. sometimes necessary and even desirable 
 to increase the limit of length. One instance of this may be found in 
 hall or corridor lights in large buildings. It is generally desirable, 
 in such cases, to control the hall lights from one point; and, as the 
 number of lights at each outlet is generally small, it would not be 
 econonrcaJ. to run mains for sub-centers of distribution. Hence, 
 in instances of this character, the length of runs will frequently exceed 
 the limit named. In the great majority of cases, however, the best 
 results are obtained by limiting the runs to 90 or 100 feet. 
 
 . There are several good reasons for placing such a limit on the 
 length of a branch circuit. To begin with, assuming that we are going 
 to place a limit on the loss in voltage (drop) from the switchboard to 
 the lamp, it may be easily proven that up to a certain reasonable 
 limit it is more economical to have a larger number of distributing 
 centers and shorter branch circuits, than to have fewer centers and 
 longer circuits. It is usual, in the better class of work, to limit the 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 35 
 
 loss in voltage in any branch circuit to approximately one volt. As- 
 suming this limit (one volt loss), it can readily be calculated that the 
 number of lights at one outlet which may be connected on a branch 
 circuit 100 feet long (using No. 14 B. & S. wire), is jour] or in the 
 case of outlets having a single light each, -five outlets may be con- 
 nected on the circuit, the first being 60 feet frcrn the cut-out, the others 
 being 10 feet apart. 
 
 These examples are selected simply to show that if the branch 
 circuits are much longer than 100 feet, the loss must be increased 
 to more than one volt, or else the number of lights that may be con- 
 nected to one circuit must be reduced to a very small quantity, pro- 
 vided, of course, the size of the wire remains the same. 
 
 Either of these alternatives is objectionable the first, on the 
 score of regulation; and the second, from an economical standpoint. 
 If, for instance, the loss in a branch circuit with all the lights turned 
 on is four volts (assuming an extreme case), the voltage at which a 
 lamp on that circuit burns will vary from four volts, depending on the 
 number of lights burning at a time. This, of course, will cause the 
 lamp to burn below candle-power when all the lamps are turned on, 
 or else to diminish its life by burning above the proper voltage when 
 it is the only lamp burning on the circuit. Then, too, if the drop in 
 the branch circuits is increased, the sizes of the feeders and the mains 
 must be correspondingly increased (if the total loss remains the same), 
 thereby increasing their cost. 
 
 If the number of lights on the circuit is decreased, we do not use 
 to good advantage the available carrying capacity of the wire. 
 
 Of course, one solution of the problem would be to increase the 
 size of the wire for the branch circuits, thus reducing the drop. This, 
 however, would not be desirable, except in certain cases where there 
 were a few long circuits, such as for corridor lights or other special 
 control circuits. In such instances as these, it would be better to 
 increase the sizes of the branch circuit to No. 12 or even No. 10 
 B. & S. Gauge conductors, than to increase the number of centers 
 3f distribution for the sake of a few circuits only, in order to reduce 
 the number of lamps (or loss) within the limit. 
 
 The method of calculating the loss in conductors has been given 
 elsewhere; but it must be borne in mind, in calculating the loss of a 
 branch circuit supplying more than one outlet, that separate calcu- 
 
36 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 lations must be made for each portion of the circuit. That is, a 
 calculation must be made for the loss to the first outlet, the length in 
 this case being the distance from the center of distribution to the first 
 outlet, and the load being the total number of lamps supplied by the 
 circuit. The next step would be to obtain the loss between the first 
 and second outlet, the length being the distance between the two out- 
 lets, and the load, in this case, being the total number of lamps sup- 
 plied by the circuit, minus the number supplied by the first outlet; 
 and so on. The loss for the total circuit would be the sum of these 
 losses for the various portions of the circuit. 
 
 Feeders and Mains. If the building is more than one story, an 
 elevation should be made showing the height and number of stories. 
 On this elevation, the various distributing centers should be shown 
 diagrammatically ; and the current in amperes supplied through 
 each center of distribution, should be indicated at each center. The 
 next step is to lay out a tentative system of feeders and mains, and to 
 ascertain the load in amperes supplied by each feeder and main. 
 The estimated length of each feeder and main should then be deter- 
 mined, and calculation made for the loss from the switchboard to 
 each center of distribution. It may be found that in some cases it 
 will be necessary to change the arrangement of feeders or mains, or 
 even the centers of distribution, in order to keep the total loss from the 
 switchboard to the lamps within the limits previously determined. 
 As a matter of fact, in important work, it is always best to lay out the 
 entire work tentatively in a more or less crude fashion, according to 
 the "cut and dried" method, in order to obtain the best results, because 
 the entire layout may be modified after the first preliminary layout 
 has been made. Of course, as one becomes more experienced and 
 skilled in these matters, the. final layout is often almost identical with 
 the first preliminary arrangement. 
 
 TESTING 
 
 Where possible, two tests of the electric wiring equipment should 
 be made, one after the wiring itself is entirely completed, and switches, 
 cut-out panels, etc., are connected; and the second one after the 
 fixtures have all been installed. The reason for this is that if a ground 
 or short circuit is discovered before the fixtures are installed, it is 
 more easily remedied; and secondly, because there is no division oi 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 37 
 
 the responsibility, as there might be if the first test were made only 
 after the fixtures were installed. If the test shows no grounds or 
 short circuits before the fixtures are installed, and one does develop 
 after they are installed, the trouble, of course, is that the short circuit 
 or ground is one or more of the fixtures. As a matter of fact, it is a 
 wise plan always to make a separate test of each fixture after it is 
 delivered at the building and before it is installed. 
 
 While a magneto is largely used for the purpose of testing, it is 
 at best a crude and unreliable method. In the first place, it does 
 not give an indication, even approximately, of the total insulation 
 resistance, but merely indicates whether there is a ground or short 
 circuit, or not. In some instances, moreover, a magneto test has 
 led to serious errors, for reasons that will be explained. If, as is 
 nearly always the case, the magneto is an alternating-current instru- 
 ment, it may sometimes happen particularly in long cables, and 
 especially where there is a lead sheathing on the cable that the 
 magneto will ring, indicating to the uninitiated that there is a ground 
 or short circuit on the cable. This may be, and usually is, far from 
 being the case; and the cause of the ringing of the magneto is not a 
 ground or short circuit, but is due to the capacity of the cable, which 
 acts as a condenser under certain conditions, since the magneto produc- 
 ing an alternating current repeatedly charges and discharges the cable 
 in opposite directions, this changing of the current causing the magneto 
 to ring. Of course, this defect in a magneto could be remedied by 
 using a commutator and changing it to a direct-current machine; 
 but as the method is faulty in itself, it is hardly worth while to do this. 
 
 A portable galvanometer with a resistance box and Wheatstone 
 bridge, is sometimes employed; but this method is objectionable 
 because it requires a special instrument which cannot be used for 
 many other purposes. Furthermore, it requires more skill and time 
 to use than the voltmeter method, which will now be described. 
 
 The advantage of the voltmeter method is that it requires merely 
 a direct-current voltmeter, which can be used for many other purposes, 
 and which all engineers or contractors should possess, together with 
 a box of cells having a potential of preferably over 30 volts. The volt- 
 meter should have a scale of not over 150 volts, for the reason that if 
 the scale on which the battery is used covers too wide a range (say 
 1,000 volts) the readings might be so small as to make the test inac- 
 
38 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 curate. A good arrangement would be to have a voltmeter Having 
 two scales say, one of 60 and one of 600 which would make the 
 voltmeter available for all practical potentials that are likely to be 
 used inside of a building. If desired, a voltmeter could be obtained 
 with three connections having three scales, the lowest scale of which 
 would be used for testing insulation resistances. 
 
 Before starting a test, all of the fuses should be inserted and 
 switches turned on, so that the complete test of the entire installation 
 can be made. When this has been done, the voltmeter and battery 
 should be connected, so as to obtain on the lowest scale of the volt- 
 meter the electromotive force of the entire group of cells. This 
 connection is shown in Fig. 33. Immediately after this has been done, 
 
 the insulation resistance to be tested 
 is placed in circuit, whether the 
 insulation to be tested is a switch- 
 board, slate panel-board, or the 
 entire wiring installation; and the 
 connections are made as shown in 
 Fig. 34. A reading should then 
 again be taken of the voltmeter; 
 and the leakage is in proportion 
 to the difference between the first 
 and second readings of the volt- 
 meter. The explanation given below 
 
 will show how this resistance may be calculated: It is evident that 
 the resistance in the first case was merely the resistance of the volt- 
 meter and the internal resistance of the battery. As a rub, the internal 
 resistance of the battery is so small in comparison with the resistance 
 of the voltmeter and the external resistance, that it may be entirely 
 neglected, and this will be done in the following calculation. In the 
 second case, however, the total resistance in circuits is the resistance 
 of the voltmeter and the battery, plus the entire insulation resistance 
 on all the wires, etc., connected in circuit. 
 
 To put this in mathematical form, the voltage of the cells may 
 be indicated by the letter E; and the reading of the voltmeter when 
 the insulation resistance is connected by the circuit, by the letter E'. 
 Let R represent the resistance of the voltmeter and R x represent the 
 insulation resistance of the installation which we w r ish to measure. 
 
 Fig. 33. Connections of Voltmeter and 
 
 Battery for Testing Insulation 
 
 Resistance. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 39 
 
 It is a fact which the reader undoubtedly knows, that the E. M. F. as 
 indicated by the voltmeter in Fig. 34 is inversely proportional to the 
 resistance: that is, the greater the resistance, the lower will be the 
 reading on the voltmeter, as this reading indicates the leakage or cur- 
 rent passing through the resistance. Putting this in the shape of a 
 formula, we have from the theory of proportion : 
 
 E : E' :: R + R x : R ; 
 or, 
 
 Transposing, 
 and 
 
 ;' R + E' R x = E R . 
 7 R X = E R - E' R = R (E-E'\ 
 R(E- E'} 
 
 Or, expressed in words, the insulation resistance is equal to the resist- 
 ance of the volt- 
 meter multiplied by 
 the difference be- 
 tween the first read- 
 ing (or the voltage 
 in the cells) and 
 the second reading 
 (or the reading of 
 the voltmeter with 
 the insulation re- 
 sistance in series with the voltmeter), divided by this last reading of 
 the voltmeter. 
 
 Example. Assume a resistance of a voltmeter (R) of 20,000 ohms, 
 and a voltage of the cells (E) of 30 volts; and suppose that the insula- 
 tion resistance test of a wiring installation, including switchboard, 
 feeders, branch circuits, panel-boards, etc., is to be made, the insula- 
 tion resistance being represented by the letter R x . By substituting 
 
 in the formula 
 
 R(E- E'} 
 
 +BUS 
 
 Fig. 34. Insulation Resistance Placed in Circuit, Ready :or 
 Testing. 
 
 Rx = 
 
 E' 
 
 and assuming that the reading of the voltmeter with the insulation 
 resistance connected is 5, we have : 
 
 R = 
 
 20,000 X (30-5) 
 
 100,000 ohms. 
 
 If the test shows an excessive amount of leakage, or a ground or 
 
40 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 short circuit, the location of the trouble may be determined by the 
 process of elimination that is, by cutting out the various feeders 
 until the ground or leakage disappears, and, when the feeder on which 
 the trouble exists has been located, by following the same process 
 with the branch circuits. 
 
 Of course, the larger the installation and the longer and more 
 numerous the circuits, the greater the leakage will be; and the lower 
 will be the insulation resistance, as there is a greater surface exposed 
 for leakage. The Rules oj the National Electric Code give a sliding 
 scale for the requirements as to insulation resistance, depending upon 
 the amount of current carried by the various feeders, branch circuits, 
 etc. The rule of the National Electric Code (No. 66) covering this 
 point, is as follows: 
 
 "The wiring in any building must test free from grounds; i. e., the com- 
 plete installation must have an insulation between conductors and between 
 all conductors and the ground (not including attachments, sockets, recepta- 
 cles, etc.) not less than that given in the following table: 
 
 Up to 5 amperes 4,000,000 ohms 
 
 10 
 
 25 
 
 50 
 
 100 
 
 200 
 
 400 
 
 800 
 
 1,600 
 
 2,000,000. 
 
 800,000 
 
 400,000 
 
 200,000 
 
 100,000 
 
 50,000 
 
 25,000 
 
 12,500 
 
 "The test must be made with all cut-outs and safety devices in place. If 
 the lamp sockets, receptacles, electroliers, etc., are also connected, only one- 
 half of the resistances specified in the table will be required." 
 
 ALTERNATING-CURRENT CIRCUITS 
 
 It is not within the province of this chapter to treat the various 
 alternating-current phenomena, but simply to outline the modifications 
 which should be made in designing and calculating electric light 
 wiring, in order to make proper allowance for these phenomena. 
 
 The most marked difference between alternating and direct cur- 
 rent, so far as wiring is concerned, is the effect produced by self- 
 induction, which is characteristic of all alternating-current circuits. 
 This self-induction varies greatly with conditions depending upon 
 the arrangement of the circuit, the medium surrounding the circuit, 
 the devices or apparatus supplied by or connected in the circuit, etc. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 41 
 
 For example, if a coil having a resistance of 100 ohms is included in 
 the circuit, a current of one ampere can be passed through the coil 
 with an electric pressure of 100 volts, if direct current is used ; while 
 it might require a potential of several hundred volts to pass a current 
 of one ampere if alternating-current were used, depending upon the 
 number of turns in the coil, whether it is wound on iron or some other 
 non-magnetic material, etc. 
 
 It will be seen from this example, that greater allowance should 
 be made for self-induction in laying out and calculating alternating- 
 current wiring, if the conditions are such that the self-induction will 
 be appreciable. 
 
 On account of self-induction, the two wires of an alternating- 
 current circuit must never be installed in separate iron or steel con- 
 duits, for the reason that such a circuit would be virtually a choke coil 
 consisting of a single turn of wire wound on an iron core, and the self- 
 induction would not only reduce the current passing through the cir- 
 cuit, but also might produce heating of the iron pipe. It is for this 
 reason that the National Electric Code requires conductors constitut- 
 ing a given circuit to be placed in the same conduit, if that conduit 
 is iron or steel, whenever the said circuit is intended to carry, or is 
 liable to carry at some future time, an alternating current. This does 
 not mean, in the case of a two-phase circuit, that all four conductors 
 need be placed in the same conduit, but that the two conductors of a 
 given phase must be placed in the same conduit. If, however, the 
 three-wire system be used for a two-phase system, all three conductors 
 should be placed in the same conduit, as should also be the case in a 
 three-wire three-phase system. Of course, in a single-phase two- or 
 three-wire system, the conductors should all be placed in the same 
 conduit. 
 
 In calculating circuits carrying alternating current, no allowance 
 usually should be made for self-induction when the conductors of the 
 same circuit are placed close together in an iron conduit. When, 
 however, the conductors are run exposed, or are separated from each 
 other, calculation should be made to determine if the effects of self- 
 induction are great enough to cause an appreciable inductive drop. 
 There are several methods of calculating this drop due to self-induc- 
 tionone by formula, and one by means of chart and table which will 
 be described. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Skin Effect. Skin effect in alternating-current circuits is caused 
 by an incorrect distribution of the current in the wire, the current 
 tending to flow through the outer portion of the wire, it being a well- 
 known fact that in alternating currents, the current density decreases 
 toward the center of the conductor, and that in large wires, the current 
 density at the center of the conductor is relatively quite small. 
 
 The skin effect increases in proportion to the square of the diam- 
 eter, and also in direct ratio to the frequency of the alternating current. 
 
 For conductors of No. 0000 B. & S. Gauge, and smaller, and for 
 frequencies of 60 cycles per second, or less, .the skin effect is negligible 
 and is less than one-half of one per cent. 
 
 For very large cables and for frequencies above 60 cycles per 
 second, the skin effect may be appreciable; and in certain cases, allow- 
 ance for it should be made in making the calculation. In ordinary 
 practice, however, it may be neglected. Table IX, taken from Alter- 
 nating-Current Wiring and Distribution, by W. R. Emmet, gives the 
 data necessary for calculating the skin effect. The figures given in 
 the first and third columns are obtained by multiplying the size of the 
 conductor (in circular mils) by the frequency (number of cycles per 
 second) ; and the figures in the second and fourth columns show the 
 factor to be used in multiplying the ohmic resistance, in order to 
 obtain the combined resistance and skin effect. 
 
 TABLE IX 
 Data for Calculating Skin Effect 
 
 PRODUCT OF CIRCULAR 
 MILS X CYCLES PER SEC. 
 
 FACTOR 
 
 PRODUCT op CIRCULAR 
 MILS X CYCLES PER SEC. 
 
 FACTOR 
 
 10,000,000 
 
 .00 
 
 70,000,000 
 
 1.13 
 
 20,000,000 
 
 .01 
 
 80,000,000 
 
 1.17 
 
 30,000,000 
 
 .03 
 
 90,000,000 
 
 1.20 
 
 40,000,000 
 
 .05 
 
 100,000,000 
 
 1.25 
 
 50,000,000 
 
 .08 
 
 125,000,000 
 
 1.34 
 
 60,000,000 
 
 .10 
 
 150,000,000 
 
 1.43 
 
 The factors given in this table, multiplied by the resistance to direct cur- 
 rents, will give the resistance to alternating currents for copper conductors of 
 circular cross-section. 
 
 Mutual Induction. When two or more circuits are run in the 
 same vicinity, there is a possibility of one circuit inducing an electro- 
 motive force in the conductors of an adjoining circuit. This effect 
 may result in raising or lowering the E. M. F. in the circuit in which a 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 43 
 
 mutual induction takes place. The amount of this induced E. M. F. 
 set up in one circuit by a parallel current, is dependent upon the cur- 
 rent, the frequency, the lengths of the circuits running parallel to each 
 other, and the relative positions of the conductors constituting the 
 said circuits. 
 
 Under ordinary conditions, and except for long circuits carrying 
 high potentials, the effect of mutual induction is so slight as to be 
 negligible, unless the conductors are improperly arranged. In order 
 to prevent mutual induction, the conductors constituting a given 
 circuit should be grouped together. Figs. 35 to 39, inclusive, show 
 
 te>ooo Alt. .035 Volts, 
 
 O O 7200 AH. ,016 Volts, 
 
 Fig. 35. 
 
 O O I6 > 000 Alt - -' 5 Volts. 
 
 7,200 Alt. .0065Volts. 
 Fig. 36. 
 
 A r\ s-\ A 13000 Ait. .070 Volts. 
 
 7,800 Alt. .038 Volts. 
 Fig. 37. 
 
 O/~\ A fa I^OOO Alt. .006 Volts. 
 
 ^ 7200 Alt. .0027 Volts. 
 
 Fig. 38. 
 
 0O O A I6 POO Alt. .112 Volts. 
 
 ^ 7 f aoo Alt .0^0 Volts, 
 
 Fig. 39. 
 
 Various Groupings of Conductors in Two Two- Wire Circuits, Giving Various 
 Effects of Induction. 
 
 five arrangements of two two-wire circuits; and show how relatively 
 small the effect of first induction is when the conductors are properly 
 arranged, as in Fig. 38, and how relatively large it may be when im- 
 properly arranged, as in Fig. 39. These diagrams are taken from 
 a publication of Mr. Charles F. Scott, entitled Polyphase Trans- 
 mission, issued by the Westinghouse Electric & Manufacturing 
 Company. 
 
 Line Capacity. The effect of capacity is usually negligible, 
 except in long transmission lines where high potentials are used ; no 
 calculations or allowance need be made for capacity, for ordinary 
 circuits. 
 
44 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Calculation of Alternating=Current Circuits. In the instruction 
 paper on 'Tower Stations and Transmission," a method is given for 
 calculating alternating-current lines by means of formulae, and data are 
 given regarding power factor and the calculation of both single-phase 
 and polyphase circuits. For short lines, secondary wiring, etc., how- 
 ever, it is probably more convenient to use the chart method devised 
 by Mr. Ralph D. Mershon, described in the American Electrician of 
 June, 1897, and partially reproduced as follows: 
 
 DROP IN ALTERNATINQ=CURRENT LINES 
 
 When alternating currents first came into use, when transmission 
 distances were short and the only loads carried were lamps, the ques- 
 tion of drop or loss of voltage in the transmitting line was a simple one, 
 and the same methods as for direct current could without serious 
 error be employed in dealing with it. The conditions existing in 
 alternating practice to-day longer distances, polyphase circuits, 
 and loads made up partly or wholly of induction motors render 
 this question less simple; and direct-current methods applied to it 
 do not lead to satisfactory results. Any treatment of this or of 
 any engineering subject, if it is to benefit the majority of engineers, 
 must not involve groping through long equations or complex diagrams 
 in search of practical results. The results, if any, must be in avail- 
 able and convenient form. In what follows, the endeavor has b?en 
 made to so treat the subject of drop in alternating-current lines tliat 
 if the reader be grounded in the theory the brief space devoted to 
 it will suffice; but if he do not comprehend or care to follow the 
 simple theory involved, he may nevertheless turn the results to his 
 practical advantage. 
 
 Calculation of Drop. Most of the matter heretofore published 
 on the subject of drop treats only of the inter-relation of the E. M. F. J s 
 involved, and, so far as the writer knows, there have not appeared 
 in convenient form the data necessary for accurately calculating this 
 quantity. Table X (page 47) and the chart (page 46) include, in a 
 form suitable for the engineer's pocketbook, everything necessary 
 for calculating the drop of alternating-current lines. 
 
 The cnart is simply an extension of the vector diagram (Fig. 40), 
 giving the relations of the E. M. F.'s of line, load and genera tpi\ In 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 45 
 
 Fig. 40, E is the generator E. M. F. ; e, the E. M. F. impressed upon 
 the load ; c, that component of E which overcomes the back E. M. F. 
 due to the impedance of the line. The component c is made up of two 
 components at right angles to each other. One is a, the component 
 overcoming the IR or back E. M. F. due to resistance of the line. 
 The other is 6, the component overcoming the reactance E. M. F. or 
 back E. M. F. due to the alternating field set up around the wire by 
 the current in the wire. The drop is the difference between E and 
 e. It is d, the radial distance between two circular arcs, one of which 
 is drawn with a radius e, and the other with a radius E. 
 
 The chart is made by striking a succession of circular arcs with 
 Oasacenter. x 
 
 The radius of the 
 smallest circle cor- 
 responds to e, the 
 E. M. F. of the 
 load, which is taken 
 as 100 per cent. 
 The radii of the suc- 
 ceeding circles in- 
 crease by 1 per cent 
 of that of the small- 
 est circle; and, as 
 the radius of the 
 last or largest cir- 
 cle is 140 per cent 
 of that of the smallest, the chart answers for drops up to 40 per cent of 
 the E. M. F. delivered. 
 
 The terms resistance volts, resistance E. M. F., reactance volts, 
 and reactance E. M. F., refer, of course, to the voltages for overcom- 
 ing the back E. M. F. J s due to resistance and reactance respectively. 
 The figures given in the table under the heading "Resistance-Volts 
 for One Ampere, etc." are simply the resistances of 2,000 feet of the 
 various sizes of wire. The values given under the heading "React- 
 ance-Volts, ptc./' are, a part of them, calculated from tables published 
 some time ago by Messrs. Houston and Kennelly. The remainder 
 were obtained by using Maxwell's formula. 
 
 The explanation given in the table accompanying the chart 
 
 Fig. 40. Vector Diagram. 
 
46 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 9 .7 
 
 LOAD POWER 
 
 
 O 10 20 3 
 
 DROP IN PERCENT OF E.1M.F. DELIVERED 
 
 Cnart for Calculating Drop in Alternating-Current Lines. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 47 
 
 TABLE X 
 Data for Calculating Drop in Alternating=Current Lines 
 
 To be used in conjunction with Chart on opposite page. 
 
 By means of the table, calculate the Resistance- Volts and the Reactance-Volts in the 
 line, and find what per cent each is of the E. M. F. delivered at the end of the line. 
 Starting from the point on the chart where the vertical line corresponding with the 
 power-factor of the load intersects the smallest circle, lay off in per cent the resistance 
 E. M. F. horizontally and to the right; from the point thus obtained, lay off upward 
 in per cent the reactance-E. M. F. The circle on which the last point falls gives the 
 drop, in per cent, of the E. M. F. delivered at the end of the line. Every tenth circle 
 arc is marked with the per cent drop *-o which it corresponds. 
 
 en 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 en 
 
 52 
 
 "*"bC 
 e^ 
 
 03 "^ 
 O) O 
 
 !, 
 
 P +^ 
 
 ||0 
 
 PHW*O 
 
 Throughout the table the lower figures in the squares give 
 values for ONE MILE of line, corresponding to those of the 
 upper figures for 1,000 feet of line. 
 
 Upper figures are REACTANCE-VOLTS in 1,000 ft. of Line (= 
 2,000 ft. of Wire) for One Ampere at 7,200 Alternations per 
 Minute (60 Cycles per Second) for the distance given between 
 Centers of Conductors. 
 
 w 
 
 1" 
 
 2" 
 
 3" 
 
 6" 
 
 9" 
 
 12" 
 
 18" 
 
 24" 
 
 30" 
 
 36" 
 
 0000 
 
 639 
 
 3,376 
 
 .098 
 
 .518 
 
 .046 
 
 .243 
 
 .079 
 
 .417 
 
 .111 
 
 .586 
 
 .130 
 .687 
 
 .161 
 
 .850 
 
 .180 
 
 .951 
 
 .193 
 
 1.02 
 
 .212 
 
 1.12 
 
 .225 
 
 1.19 
 
 .235 
 
 1.24 
 
 .244 
 
 1.29 
 
 000 
 00 
 
 507 
 
 2,677 
 
 .124 
 
 .653 
 
 .052 
 
 .275 
 
 .085 
 
 .449 
 
 .116 
 
 .613 
 
 .135 
 .713 
 
 .167 
 
 .882 
 
 .185 
 
 .977 
 
 .199 
 
 1.05 
 
 .217 
 
 1.15 
 
 .230 
 
 1.22 
 
 .241 
 
 1.27 
 
 .249 
 
 1.32 
 
 .254 
 
 1.34 
 
 .259 
 
 1.37 
 
 402 
 
 2,123 
 
 .156 
 
 .824 
 
 .057 
 
 .301 
 
 .090 
 
 .475 
 
 .121 
 
 .639 
 
 .140 
 .739 
 
 .172 
 
 .908 
 
 .190 
 
 1.00 
 
 .204 
 
 1.08 
 
 .222 
 
 1.17 
 
 .236 
 
 1.25 
 
 .246 
 
 1.30 
 
 
 
 319 
 
 1,685 
 
 .197 
 
 1.04 
 
 .063 
 
 .332 
 
 .095 
 
 .502 
 
 .127 
 
 .671 
 
 .145 
 
 .766 
 
 .177 
 
 .935 
 
 .196 
 
 1.04 
 
 .209 
 
 1.10 
 
 .228 
 
 1.20 
 
 .233 
 
 1.23 
 
 .238 
 
 1.26 
 
 .241 
 
 1.27 
 
 .251 
 
 1.33 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 253 
 
 1,335 
 
 .248 
 
 1.31 
 
 .068 
 
 .359 
 
 .101 
 
 .533 
 
 .132 
 
 .687 
 
 .151 
 
 .797 
 
 .183 
 
 .966 
 
 .201 
 
 1.06 
 
 .214 
 
 1.13 
 
 .246 
 
 1.30 
 
 .256 
 
 1.35 
 
 .265 
 
 1.40 
 
 201 
 
 1,059 
 
 .313 
 
 1.65 
 
 .074 
 
 .391 
 
 .106 
 .560 
 
 .138 
 
 .728 
 
 .156 
 
 .824 
 
 .188 
 
 .993 
 
 .206 
 
 1.09 
 
 .220 
 
 1.16 
 
 .252 
 
 1.33 
 
 .262 
 
 1.38 
 
 .270 
 
 1.43 
 
 3 
 
 159 
 
 840 
 
 .394 
 
 2.08 
 
 .079 
 
 .417 
 
 .112 
 
 .591 
 
 .143 
 
 .755 
 
 .162 
 .856 
 
 .193 
 
 1.02 
 
 .212 
 
 1.12 
 
 .225 
 
 1.19 
 
 .244 
 
 1.29 
 
 .257 
 
 1.36 
 
 .267 
 
 1.41 
 
 .275 
 
 1.45 
 
 .281 
 
 1.48 
 
 4 
 
 126 
 
 666 
 
 .497 
 
 2.63 
 
 .085 
 
 .449 
 
 .117 
 
 .618 
 
 .149 
 
 .787 
 
 .167 
 
 .882 
 
 .199 
 
 1.05 
 
 .217 
 
 1.15 
 
 .230 
 
 1.22 
 
 .249 
 
 1.32 
 
 .254 
 
 1.34 
 
 .262 
 
 1.38 
 
 .272 
 
 1.44 
 
 5 
 
 100 
 
 528 
 
 .627 
 
 3.31 
 
 .090 
 
 .475 
 
 .121 
 
 .639 
 
 .154 
 .813 
 
 .172 
 
 .908 
 
 .204 
 
 1.08 
 
 .223 
 
 1.18 
 
 .236 
 
 1.25 
 
 .268 
 
 1.42 
 
 .278 
 
 1.47 
 
 .286 
 
 1.51 
 
 6 
 
 79 
 
 419 
 
 .791 
 
 4.18 
 
 .095 
 
 .502 
 
 .127 
 
 .671 
 
 .158 
 .834 
 
 .178 
 
 .940 
 
 .209 
 
 1.10 
 
 .214 
 
 1.13 
 
 .228 
 
 1.20 
 
 .233 
 
 1.23 
 
 .241 
 
 1.27 
 
 .246 
 
 1.30 
 
 .260 
 
 1.37 
 
 .265 
 
 1.40 
 
 .270 
 
 1.43 
 
 .272 
 
 1.44 
 
 .278 
 
 1.47 
 
 .283 
 
 1.49 
 
 ,291 
 
 1.54 
 
 .296 
 
 1.56 
 
 .302 
 
 1.60 
 
 7 
 
 63 
 
 332 
 
 .997 
 
 5.27 
 
 .101 
 
 .533 
 
 .132 
 
 .697 
 
 .164 
 
 .866 
 
 .183 
 
 .966 
 
 .288 
 
 1.52 
 
 8 
 
 50 
 
 263 
 
 1.260 
 
 6.64 
 
 .106 
 .560 
 
 .138 
 
 .729 
 
 .169 
 
 .893 
 
 .188 
 
 .993 
 
 .220 
 
 1.16 
 
 .238 
 
 1.26 
 
 .252 
 
 1 33 
 
 .284 
 
 1.50 
 
 .293 
 
 1.55 
 
48 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 (Table X) is thought to be a sufficient guide to its use, but a few 
 examples may be of value. 
 
 Problem. Power to be delivered, 250 K.W. ; E. M. F. to be delivered, 
 2,000 volts; distance of transmission, 10,000 feet; size of wire, No. 0; distance 
 between wires, 18 inches; power factor of load, .8; frequency, 7,200 alterna- 
 tions per minute. Find the line loss and drop. 
 
 Remembering that the power factor is that fraction by which 
 the apparent power of volt-amperes must be multiplied to give the 
 true power, the apparent power to be delivered is 
 
 250 K.W. A __ w 
 
 - =312.5 apparent K.W, 
 
 .8 
 
 The current, therefore, at 2,000 volts will be 
 
 312,500 1K . _ 
 _-:=156.25 amperes. 
 
 From the table of reactances under the heading "18 inches," and 
 corresponding to No. wire, is obtained the constant .228. Bearing 
 the instructions of the table in mind, the reactance-volts of this line 
 are, 156.25 (amperes) X 10 (thousands of feet) X .228=356.3 volts, 
 which is 17.8 per cent of the 2,000 volts to be delivered. 
 
 From the column headed "Resistance-Volts" and corresponding 
 to No. wire, is obtained the constant .197. The resistance-volts 
 of the line are, therefore, 156.25 (amperes) X 10 (thousands of feet) 
 X .197=307.8 volts, which is 15.4 per cent of the 2,000 volts to be 
 delivered. 
 
 Starting, in accordance with the instructions of the table, from 
 the point where the vertical line (which at the bottom of the chart 
 is marked "Load Power Factor" .8) intersects the inner or smallest 
 circle, lay off horizontally and to the right the resistance-E. M. F. in 
 per cent (15 .4) ; and from the point thus obtained, lay off vertically the 
 reactance-E. M. F. in per cent (17.8). The last point falls at about 
 23 per cent, as given by the circular arcs. This, then, is the drop, in 
 per cent, of the E. M. F. delivered. The drop, in per cent, of the genera- 
 tor E. M. F. is, of course, 
 
 23 
 
 8.7 per cent. 
 
 The percentage loss of power in the line has not, as with direct 
 current, the same value as the percentage drop. This is due to the 
 fact that the line has reactance, and also that the apparent power 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 49 
 
 delivered to the load is not identical with the true power that is, 
 the load power factor is less than unity. The loss must be obtained 
 by calculating P R for the line, or, what amounts to the same thing, 
 by multiplying the resistance-volts by the current. 
 
 The resistance-volts in this case are 307.8, and the current 
 156.25 amperes. The loss b 307.8 X 156.25 = 48.1 K. W. The 
 percentage loss is 
 
 48.1 
 
 250+48.1 
 
 Therefore, for the problem taken, the drop is 18.7 per cent, and the 
 loss is 16 . 1 per cent. If the problem be to find the size wire for a given 
 drop, it must be solved by trial. Assume a size of wire and calculate 
 the drop ; the result in connection with the table will show the direction 
 and extent of the change necessary in the size of wire to give the 
 required drop. 
 
 The effect of the line reactance in increasing the drop should be 
 noted. If there were no reactance, the drop in the above example 
 would be given by the point obtained in laying off on the chart the 
 resistance-E. M. F. (15.4) only. This point falls at 12.4 per cent, 
 and the drop in terms of the generator E. M. F. would be 
 
 12 4 
 
 ' =11 per cent, instead of 18 . 7 per cent. 
 11.2 .4 
 
 Anything therefore which will reduce reactance is desirable. 
 
 Reactance can be reduced in two ways. One of these is to 
 diminish the distance between wires. The extent to which this can 
 be carried is limited, in the case of a pole line, to the least distance at 
 which the wires are safe from swinging together in the middle of the 
 span; in inside wiring, by the danger from fire. The other way of 
 reducing reactance is to split the copper up into a greater number of 
 circuits, and arrange these circuits so that there is no inductive inter- 
 action. For instance, suppose that in the example worked out above, 
 two No. 3 wires were used instead of one No. wire. The resistance- 
 volts would be practically the same, but the reactance-volts would be 
 
 244 
 less in the ratio \ X ~ = 535, since each circuit would bear half the 
 
 current the No. circuit does, and the constant for No. 3 wire i? . 244, 
 instead of . 228 that for No. 0. The effect of subdividing the copper 
 is also shown if in the example given it is desired to reduce the drop 
 
50 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 to, say, one-half. Increasing the copper from No. to No. 0000 will 
 not produce the required result, for, although the resistance-volts will 
 be reduced one-half, the reactance-volts will be reduced only in the 
 ratio .212. If, however, two inductively independent circuits of No. 
 
 .228* 
 
 wire be used, the resistance- and reactance-volts will both be reduced 
 one-half, and the drop will therefore be diminished the required 
 amount. 
 
 The component of drop due to reactance is best diminished by sub- 
 dividing the copper or by bringing the conductors closer together. It 
 is little affected by change in size of conductors. 
 
 An idea of the manner in which changes of power factor affect 
 drop is best gotten by an example. Assume distance of transmission, 
 distance between conductors E. M. F., and frequency, the same as in 
 the previous example. Assume the apparent power delivered the 
 same as before, and let it be constant, but let the power factor be given 
 several different values; the true power will therefore be a variable 
 depending upon the value of the power factor. Let the size of wire 
 be No. 0000. As the apparent power, and hence the current, is the 
 same as before, and the line resistance is one-half, the resistance- 
 E. M. F. will in this case be 
 
 15 4 
 
 , or 7 . 7 per cent of the E. M. F. delivered. 
 
 Also, the reactance-E. M. F. will be 
 
 .212X17.8 _ . 
 
 228~ - 16. 5 per cent. 
 
 Combining these on the chart for a power factor of .4, and deducing 
 the drop, in per cent, of the generator E. M. F., the value obtained is 
 15.3 per cent; with a power factor of .8, the drop is 14 per cent; 
 with a power factor of unity, it is 8 per cenl. If in this example the 
 true power, instead of the apparent power, had been taken as constant, 
 it is evident that the values of drop would have differed more widely, 
 since the current, and hence the resistance- and reactance-volts, 
 would have increased as the power factor diminished. The condition 
 taken more nearly represents that of practice. 
 
 If the line had resistance and no reactance, the several values 
 of drop, instead of 15.3, 14, and 8, would be 3.2, 5.7, and 7.2 per 
 cent respectively, showing that for a load of lamps the drop will not 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 51 
 
 be much increased by reactance; but that with a load, such as induc- 
 tion motors, whose power factor is less than unity, care should ba 
 taken to keep the reactance as low as practicable. In all cases it is 
 advisable to place conductors as close together as good practice will 
 permit. 
 
 When there is a transformer in circuit, and it is desired to obtain 
 the combined drop of transformer and line, it is necessary to know 
 the resistance- and reactance-volts of the transformer. The resist- 
 ance-volts of the combination of line and transformer are the sum of 
 the resistance-volts of the line and the resistance-volts of the trans- 
 former. Similarly, the reactance-volts of the line and transformer 
 are the sum of their respective reactance-volts. The resistance- and 
 reactance-E. M. F.s of transformers may usually be obtained from 
 the makers, and are ordinarily given in per cent.* These per- 
 centages express the values of the resistance- and reactance-E. M. F/s 
 when the transformer .delivers its normal full-load current; and they 
 express these values in terms of the normal no-load E. M. F. of the 
 transformer. 
 
 Consider a transformer built for transformation between 1,000 
 and 100 volts. Suppose the resistance- and reactance-E. M. F.'s given 
 are 2 per cent and 7 per cent respectively. Then the corresponding 
 voltages when the transformer delivers full-load current, are 2 and 7 
 volts or 20 and 70 volts according as the line whose drop is required 
 is connected to the low-voltage or high-voltage terminals. These 
 values, 2 7 and 20 70, hold, no matter at what voltage the trans- 
 
 *When the required values cannot be obtained from the makers, they may be 
 measured. Measure the resistance of both coils. If the line to be calculated is attached 
 to the high- voltage terminals of the transformer, the equivalent resistance is that of the 
 high-voltage coil, plus the resistance obtained by increasing in the square of the ratio of 
 transformation the measured resistance of the low-voltage coil That is, if the ratio of 
 transformation is 10, the equivalent resistance referred to the high-voltage circuit is 
 the resistance of the high- voltage coil, plus 100 times that of the low- voltage coil. This 
 equivalent resistance multiplied by the high-voltage current gives the transformer 
 resistance-volts referred to the high-voltage circuit. Similarly, the equivalent resist- 
 ance referred to the low- voltage circuit is the resistance of the low-voltage coil, plus that 
 of the high- voltage coil reduced in the square of the ratio of transformation. It follows, 
 of course, from this, that the values of the resistance- volts referred to the two circuits 
 bear to each other the ratio of transformation. To obtain the reactance-volts, short- 
 circuit one coil of the transformer arid measure the voltage necessary to force through 
 the other coil its normal current at normal frequency. The result is, nearly enough, 
 the reactance-volts. It makes no difference which coil is short-circuited, as the results 
 obtained in one case will bear to those in the other the ratio of transformation. If a 
 close value is desired, subtract from the square of the voltage reading the square of the 
 resistance-volts, and take the square root of the difference as the reactance- volts. 
 
52 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 former is operated, since they depend only upon the strength of cur- 
 rent, providing it is of the normal frequency. If any other than the 
 full-load current is drawn from the transformer, the reactance- and 
 resistance-volts will be such a proportion of the values given above 
 as the current flowing is of the full-load current. It may be noted, in 
 passing, that when the resistance- and reactance-volts of a trans- 
 former are known, its regulation may be determined by making use 
 of the chart in the same way as for a line having resistance and 
 reactance. 
 
 As an illustration of the method of calculating the drop in a 
 line and transformer, and also of the use of table and chart in calculat- 
 ing low-voltage mains, the following example is given : 
 
 Problem. A single-phase induction motor is to be supplied with 20 am- 
 peres at 200 volts; alternations, 7,200 per minute; power factor, .78. The 
 distance from transformer to motor is 150 feet, and the line is No. 5 wire, 6 
 inches between centers of conductors. The transformer reduces in the ratio 
 
 2 000 
 ' , has a capacity of 25 amperes at 200 volts, and, when delivering this 
 
 current and voltage, its re&Istance-E. M. F. is 2.5 per cent, its reactance- 
 E. M. F. 5 per cent. Find the drop. 
 
 The reactance of 1,000 feet of circuit consisting of two No. 5 
 wires, 6 inches apart, is .204. The reactance-volts therefore are 
 
 .204 X ~ X 20 = .61 volts. 
 1 ,uUU 
 
 The resistance-volts are 
 
 .627 X r X 20 = 1.88 volts. 
 
 At 25 amperes, the resistance-volts of the transformer are 2.5 per 
 
 20 
 
 cent of 200, or 5 volts. At 20 amperes, they are of this, or 4 volts. 
 
 u 
 
 Similarly, the transformer reactance-volts at 25 amperes are 10, 
 and at 20 amperes are 8 volts. The combined reactance-volts of 
 transformer and line are 8 + .61 = 8.61, which is 4.3 per cent of 
 the 200 volts to be delivered. The combined resistance-volts are 1.88 
 +4, or 5.88, which is 2.94 per cent of the E. M. F. to be delivered. 
 Combining these quantities on the chart with a power factor of .78, 
 the drop is 5 per cent of the delivered E. M. F., 
 
 or - = 4.8 per cent 
 105 
 
 of the impressed E. M. F. The transformer must be supplied with 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 53 
 
 = 2 ,100 volts, 
 
 in order that 200 volts shall be delivered to the motor. 
 
 Table X (page 47) is made out for 7,200 alternations, but will 
 answer for any other number if the values for reactance be changed 
 in direct proportion to the change in alternations. For instance, 
 
 i f\ nnn 
 
 for 16,000 alternations, multiply the reactances given by ' 
 
 ,^UU 
 
 For other distances between centers of conductors, interpolate the 
 values given in the table. As the reactance values for different sizes 
 of wire change by a constant amount, the table can, if desired, be 
 readily extended for larger or smaller conductors. 
 
 The table is based on the assumption of sine currents and 
 E. M. F.'s. The best practice of to-day produces machines which 
 so closely approximate this condition that results obtained by the 
 above methods are well within the limits of practical requirements. 
 
 Polyphase Circuits. So far, single-phase circuits only have 
 been dealt with. A simple extension of the methods given above 
 adapts them to the calculation of polyphase circuits. A four-wire 
 quarter-phase (two-phase) transmission may, so far as loss and regula- 
 tion are concerned, be replaced by two single-phase circuits identical 
 (as to size of wire, distance between wires, current, and E. M. F.) 
 with the two circuits of the quarter-phase transmission, provided that 
 in both cases there is no inductive interaction between circuits. There- 
 fore, to calculate a four-wire, quarter-phase transmission, compute 
 the single-phase circuit required to transmit one-half the power at 
 the same voltage. The quarter-phase transmission will require two 
 such circuits. 
 
 A three-wire, three-phase transmission, of which the conductors 
 are symmetrically related, may, so far as loss and regulation are 
 concerned, be replaced by two single-phase circuits having no in- 
 ductive interaction, and identical with the three-phase line as to 
 size, wire, and distance between wires. Therefore, to calculate a 
 three-phase transmission, calculate a single-phase circuit to ca^ry 
 one-half the load at the same voltage. The three-phase transmis- 
 sion will require three wires of the size and distance between centers 
 as obtained for the single-phase. 
 
 SL three-wire, two-phase transmission may be calculated 
 
54 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 exactly as regards loss, and approximately as regards drop, in the 
 same way as for three-phase. It is possible to exactly calculate 
 the drop, but this involves a more complicated method than the 
 approximate one. The error by this approximate method is gen- 
 erally small. It is possible, also, to get a somewhat less drop and 
 loss with the same copper by proportioning the cross-section of 
 the middle and outside wires of a three-wire, quarter-phase circuit 
 to the currents they carry, instead of using three wires of the same 
 size. The advantage, of course, is not great, and it will not be con- 
 sidered here. 
 
 WIRING AN OFFICE BUILDING 
 
 The building selected as a typical sample of a wiring installation 
 is that of an office building located in Washington, D. C. The figures 
 shown are reproductions of the plans actually used in installing the 
 work. 
 
 The building consists of a basement and ten stories. It is of 
 fireproof construction, having steel beams with terra-cotta flat arches. 
 The main walls are of brick and the partition walls of terra-cotta 
 blocks, finished with plaster. There is a space of approximately five 
 inches between the top of the iron beams and the top of the finished 
 floor, of which space about three inches was available for running 
 the electric conduits. The flooring is of wood in the offices, but of 
 concrete, mosaic, or tile in the basement, halls, toilet-rooms, 
 etc. 
 
 The electric current supply is derived from the mains of the local 
 illuminating company, the mains being brought into the front of the 
 building and extending to a switchboard located near the center of the 
 basement. 
 
 As the building is a very substantial fireproof structure, the only 
 method of wiring considered was that in which the circuits would be 
 installed in iron conduits. 
 
 Electric Current Supply. The electric current supply is direct 
 current, two-wire for power, and three-wire for lighting, having a 
 potential of 236 volts between the outside conductors, and 118 volte 
 between the neutral and either outside conductor. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 55 
 
 Switchboard. On the switchboard in the basement are mounted 
 wattmeters, provided by the local electric company, and the various 
 switches required for the control and operation of the lighting and 
 power feeders. There are a total of ten triple-pole switches for light- 
 ing, and eighteen for power. An indicating voltmeter and ampere 
 meter are also placed in the switchboard. A voltmeter is provided 
 with a double-throw switch, and so arranged as to measure the poten- 
 tial across the two outside conductors, or between the neutral con- 
 ductor and either of the outside conductors. The ampere meter is 
 arranged with two shunts, one being placed in each outside leg; the 
 shunts are connected with a double-pole, double-throw switch, so 
 that the ampere meter can be connected to either shunt and thus 
 measure the current supplied on each side of the system. 
 
 Character of Load. The building is occupied partly as a news- 
 paper office, and there are several large presses in addition to the usual 
 linotype machines, trimmers, shavers, cutters, saws, etc. There are 
 also electrically-driven exhaust fans, house pumps, air-compressors, 
 etc. The upper portion of the building is almost entirely devoted 
 to offices rented to outside parties. The total number of motors 
 supplied was 55; and the total number of outlets, 1,100, supplying 
 2,400 incandescent lamps and 4 arc lamps. 
 
 Feeders and Mains. The arrangement of the various feeders 
 and mains, the cut-out centers, mains, etc., which they supply, are 
 shown diagrammatically in Fig. 41, which also gives in schedule the 
 sizes of feeders, mains, and motor circuits, and the data relating to the 
 cut-out panels. 
 
 Although the current supply was to be taken from an outside 
 source, yet, inasmuch as there was a probability of a plant being in- 
 stalled in the building itself at some future time, the three-wire system 
 of feeders and mains was designed, with a neutral conductor equal 
 to the combined capacity of the two outside conductors, so that 
 120-volt two-wire generators could be utilized without any change in 
 the feeders. 
 
 Basement. The plan of the basement, Fig. 42, shows the branch 
 circuit wiring for the outlets in the basement, and the location of the 
 main switchboard. It also shows the trunk cables for the inter- 
 connection system serving to provide the necessary wires for telephones, 
 
FEEDERS 
 
 X ALL CONDUCTORS IN ONE CONDUIT. 
 XX SEPARATE CONDUIT FOR E ACH CONDUCTOR 
 XXX THIS FEEDER IS TO BE DIVIDED INTO FOUR (-*) 
 CONDUCTORS OF H 2OOOOOO CM. EACH. 
 " EACH CONDUCTOR IS TO BE INSTALLED IN A SEP- 
 
 - ARATE 3" (INSIDE DIAM) CONDUIT 
 I_S?- LIGHTING SUPPLY 
 
 P.S.=POWER 
 
 XXX* SEPARATE 3" (INSIDE DIAt^CONDUIT FOR EACH 
 CONDUCTOR 
 
 X ALL CONDUCTORS IN ONE CONDUIT 
 
 MOTOR CIRCUITS 
 
 i 
 
 SUPPLIED BY 
 
 s ! 
 
 Si 
 
 oc ^ 
 0? 
 
 LENGTH i 
 
 JO 3ZIS | W 
 
 ."-"-o 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 id 
 
 i 
 
 Z3 
 
 
 
 3 
 u. 
 
 1 INSID 
 
 r; DIAM.C 
 
 j!J CONOU 
 
 ,- 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 ,.-' 
 
 5 
 
 20 
 
 5.0 
 
 s 
 
 zz 
 
 ',- 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 _L5_ 
 15 
 
 6O 
 
 -$- 
 
 ^3 
 
 eo. 
 
 -i- 
 
 W- 
 
 3t 
 
 0-10 
 
 o 
 
 10 Th- 
 
 
 3O 
 
 u-> 
 
 -&- 
 
 -4- 
 
 BOTH CONDUCTORS IN ONE CONDUIT 
 
 CUT-OUTS 
 
 TH 
 
 HAS CONNECTIONS FOR 
 
 fr 
 
 FE SWITCHES 
 
 8 
 
 Fig. 41. Wiring of an Office Building. Diagram Showing Arrangement of 
 Feeders and Mains, Cut-Out Centers, etc. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 57 
 
 SCHEDULE OF CIRCUITS' 
 
 CABt_E NO. & RISES TO S^d FLOOR 
 
 Showing Explanation 
 Of Various Symbols used in 
 Figs. 41 to 46 Inclusive 
 
 Ceiling Chandelier 
 Wall Bracket 
 --Gooseneck Bracket 
 Wall Socket 
 Drop Cord 
 Arc Lamp 
 Cooper-Hewitt Lamp 
 Cluster 
 Floor Outlet 
 
 -Desk Light 
 
 Extension Outlet 
 
 Push Button Switch 
 
 Snap Swltchi 
 
 -Junction Box 
 Electric Clock 
 
 Master Clock 
 
 Motor Starter 
 
 Cut-Out Panel . 
 
 Interconnection Box 
 
 Power Panel 
 
 -Pull Box 
 
 Circuit under Floor 
 
 " " " above 
 
 "' on Ceiling- Exposed 
 
 Service Line under Floor 
 
 Fig. 42. Wiring an Office Building. Basement Plan Showing Branch Circuit Wiring for 
 
 Outlets in Basement, Location of Main Switchboard, and Trunk Cables of the 
 
 Interconnection System Providing Wires for Telephone, 
 
 Ticker, and Messenger Call Service, etc, 
 
58 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 tickers, messenger calls, etc., in all the rooms throughout the building, 
 as will be described later. 
 
 To avoid confusion, the feeders were not shown on the basement 
 plan, but were described in detail in the specification, and installed 
 in accordance with directions issued at the time of installation. The 
 electric current supply enters the building at the front, and a service 
 switch and cut-out are placed on the front wall. From this point, a 
 two-wire feeder for power and a three-wire feeder for lighting, are 
 run to the main switchboard located near the center of the basement. 
 Owing to the size of the conduits required for these supply feeders, as 
 well as the main feeders extending to the upper floors of the building, 
 the said conduits are run exposed on substantial hangers suspended 
 from the basement ceiling. 
 
 First Floor. The rear portion of the building from the basement 
 through the first floor, Fig. 43, and including the mezzanine floor, 
 between the first and second floors, at the rear portion of the building 
 only, is utilized as a press room for several large and heavy, modern 
 newspaper presses. The motors and controllers for these presses are 
 located on the first floor. A separate feeder for each of these press 
 motors is run directly from the main switchboard to the motor con- 
 troller in each case. Empty conduits were provided, extending from 
 the controllers to the motor in each case, intended for the various 
 control wires installed by the contractor for the press equipments. 
 
 One-half of the front portion of the first floor is utilized as a news- 
 paper office; the remaining half, as a bank. 
 
 Second Floor. The rear portion of the second floor, Fig. 44, is 
 occupied as a composing and linotype room, and is illuminated chiefly 
 by means of drop-cords from outlets located over the linotype machines 
 and over the compositors' cases. Separate ^-horse-power motors 
 are provided for each linotype machine, the circuits for the same being 
 run underneath the floor. 
 
 Upper Floors. A typical plan (Fig. 45) is shown of the upper 
 floors, as they are similar in all respects with the exception of certain 
 changes in partitions, which are not material for the purpose of illus- 
 tration or for practical example. The circuit work is sufficiently 
 intelligible from the plan to require no further explanation. 
 
 Interconnection System. Fig. 46 is a diagram of the intercon- 
 nection system, showing the main interconnection box located in the 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 59 
 
 SCHEDULE OF CIRCUITS 
 
 ~J3> 
 
 RISE TO CONTROLLI 
 7-0" FF 
 
 RISE TO CONTROLLED 
 "-^-"rrB^'-O" 1 FRpMJF 
 
 i 
 ^---*---S-^ L* 
 
 U UJ I '^ 
 
 Mife^^l 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 SUP- 
 PLED 
 
 5 
 1 
 
 OUTLETS 
 SUPPLIED 
 
 TOTAL 
 
 AT WHAT 
 POINT 
 CONTROLLED 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 \r> 
 
 til 
 
 /) 
 
 j 
 
 I 
 
 B 
 
 'N^? 
 
 
 ci 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 Sa.tQ 
 
 LL 
 
 t' 
 
 i' 
 
 
 tocde 
 
 4- 
 
 
 k ** ** 
 
 m 
 
 * 
 
 44 
 
 
 f 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 TV 
 
 ** 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 : i 
 
 
 V 
 
 * 
 
 ti 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 C 
 
 
 =1 
 
 Wll 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 ,_.,,- 
 IX 
 
 ^rr 
 
 ___ 
 
 
 Him 
 nop 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 <o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 76 
 
 q a fr\ 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 ___ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1? 
 
 * 
 
 1* 
 
 
 V W X 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 1 3 
 
 
 l>* 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 *. 
 
 (* 
 
 
 z 
 
 1 
 
 : / 
 
 
 1f> 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 a' 
 
 1 
 
 U ; 
 
 ii ii it 
 
 16 
 
 (4 
 
 - * 
 
 
 t>' 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 
 1 / 
 
 ** 
 
 ** 
 
 
 c'd'e'f ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 W) 
 
 
 ii 
 
 TT 
 
 l>-1 
 
 
 3 Receptacles 
 
 Q 
 
 b 
 
 
 20 
 
 (i 
 
 ' i 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 8 
 
 
 |3 
 
 i- < 
 
 <t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 i~- 
 
 i i 
 
 
 g'Ki 1 
 
 a 
 
 g 
 
 SatD 
 
 n 
 
 1 1 
 
 6 i. 
 
 
 3E i 
 
 J 
 
 <T) 
 
 
 ,-a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 ih h 
 
 M 
 
 IZ Z . PLAN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,'"+ 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .>[ 
 
 E 
 
 L.-I 
 
 1 
 
 v'z 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 J 
 
 Scz^ E. 
 
 3J 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 rt 
 
 i* ii i* 
 
 n 
 
 ** 
 
 ' * 
 
 
 "b" 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 i * 
 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 
 s 
 
 ti 
 
 * * 
 
 1 
 
 d"e"fji g'). 
 
 4 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 35 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,-;,. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =hb 
 
 r- 
 
 lEZZ. PLAN 
 
 
 
 
 38 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3j ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4U 
 
 h 
 
 
 1 
 
 o" 
 
 1 
 
 B 
 
 SatF 
 
 41 
 
 
 
 
 P" 
 
 1 
 
 '- 
 
 
 4? 
 
 
 
 
 qii r n 
 
 ^ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 43 
 
 4 
 
 * * 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^i 
 
 
 44 
 
 fc 
 
 * * 
 
 1 
 
 t"u!' 
 
 5 
 
 ID 
 
 it * it 
 
 4S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 3j 
 
 " fc " 
 
 NOTE: THE CLOCKS IN STORE AND COUMTr 
 ING ROOM ARE TO BE LOCATED 
 AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT. 
 
 WALL BETWEEN 
 PRESS ROOM & 
 PAPER STORAGE 
 
 PRESS R'M 
 
 SKETCH SHOWING ROUTE OF 
 
 EMPTY CONDUITS RISIN3 TO COSH 
 
 TROLLER PLATFORM IN PRESS 
 
 ROOM.. 
 
 NOTE: ALL CONDUITS FOR THE PRESSES MUST COME 
 
 THROUGH THE CONTROLLER PLATFORM 2 1" FROM 
 THE WALL. 
 
 ALL CONDUITS ARE; TO TERMINATE IN PRESS Aia 
 
 DIRECTE.P. 
 
 Fig. 43. Wiring of an Office Building. 
 
 First-Floor Plan, Showing Press Room in Rear, Containing Motors and Controllers for 
 
 Newspaper Presses, Fed Directly from Main Switchboard in Basement; 
 
 also, in front, Newspaper Counting Room and Bank Offices. 
 
SCHEDULE o* CIRCUITS 
 
 SUP- 
 PLIED 
 
 NS^/BRANCMES 
 
 OUTLETS 
 SUPPLIED 
 
 TCfTA 
 
 AT WHAT 
 POINT 
 CONTROLLED 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 il 
 
 NIVW^Ti 
 
 OUTLETS 
 
 LIGHTS 
 
 J 7T- 
 
 A-2 
 
 
 a. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 So.tA 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 r def 
 
 | 
 
 3 
 
 
 ^r-^- 
 
 4r- 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 ilki. 
 
 a 
 
 .'V 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 
 SBT^" 
 
 
 
 
 !! 
 
 ., 
 
 
 >. [ * 
 
 
 
 oqrs 
 
 4. 
 
 ^-+ 
 
 
 X " 
 
 4il 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 | 
 
 
 11 " 
 
 ** 
 
 
 v 
 
 i 
 
 IE 
 
 
 
 w&6DrcpC'ds 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 IE 
 
 ~rr 
 
 
 
 r j 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2< 
 
 /'- 
 
 
 ib b 
 
 S 
 
 
 Drop Cords 
 
 g 
 
 g 
 
 
 ib - 
 
 
 
 
 
 * . 
 
 
 
 4 * 
 
 
 ** 
 
 ** 
 
 * * 
 
 
 16 ** 
 
 fci - 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 13 ** 
 
 t< - 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 " 
 
 4 * 
 
 
 S k ' 
 
 
 
 
 t , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OL 4i . 
 
 -* 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 
 i? 
 
 4 * 
 
 
 
 * fc 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 ** 
 
 ** 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 i; 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 1 
 
 * * 
 
 
 30 '* 
 
 ** 
 
 1 
 
 
 * 
 
 n 
 
 
 ^1 ' 
 
 44 
 
 
 * l 
 
 
 
 
 34 TV 
 
 ~rr 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 ", 
 
 
 35 " 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^5" 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 Sat e 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 9 
 
 
 ^ y ;' 
 
 ~rr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sat B 
 
 
 
 
 I'm 1 
 
 ' 
 
 J ' 
 
 Sat B 
 
 T^^ 
 
 ~rr 
 
 
 Drop Cords 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 f~\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 45 C 
 
 ,-<> 
 
 1 
 
 ^'o' 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 Sat C' 
 
 46 " 
 
 fct - 
 
 1 
 
 P* 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TERMINATE ALL. MOTOR CIRCUITS 
 AT MOTOR CONTROLLER AS 
 DIRECTED 
 
 MOTOR CIRCU ITS 
 
 * BOTH CONDUCTORS IN ONE CONDUIT 
 * *2N- P - REDUCED TO ^ H.F? 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 SUPPLIED 
 BY 
 
 O 
 UJ 
 
 CURRENT 
 IN AMPERES 
 
 if 
 
 1! 
 
 oj; 
 
 Si 
 
 05 
 
 <t* 
 
 S oS 
 
 SB 
 
 FEtDER NO 
 
 
 
 FLOOR 
 
 H.RSUPPI 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 L) 
 
 ^NU 
 
 * * 
 
 
 QQ 
 
 10 
 
 jS" 
 
 -i- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H. ' 
 
 
 n 
 
 / ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 * 
 
 ** 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 * ' 
 
 
 few 
 
 
 
 i2- 
 
 " 
 
 TT 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 r 
 
 <r 
 
 _ r 
 
 " 
 ___ 
 
 | 
 
 
 1 
 
 r t 
 
 n 
 n 
 
 ii 
 
 -< 
 
 TT 
 
 
 -tt- 
 
 
 it 
 
 - if 
 
 n 
 
 : ;_' 
 
 " 
 
 " 
 
 ' 
 
 " 
 
 
 |4 
 
 I " 
 
 " 
 
 1 
 
 .. 
 
 
 
 -IT- 
 
 
 2 
 
 TT- 
 
 1 n 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 *' 
 
 *' 
 
 * 
 
 * t 
 
 
 II 
 
 n 
 
 ** 
 
 : le 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 ** 
 
 
 , r ^l 
 
 " 
 
 * 
 
 -T' ' 
 
 3j 
 
 
 
 
 jj 
 
 
 36 
 
 3O 
 
 ., 
 
 " 
 
 | 
 
 r 
 
 IT 
 
 ~4* 
 
 * 
 
 
 S| 
 
 *r 
 
 n 
 
 3^ 
 
 ** 
 
 L 
 
 ' 
 
 3 
 
 
 : M 
 
 
 
 dij 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ** 
 
 * 
 
 Jfc> 
 
 ** 
 
 * * 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 52 
 
 ** 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 ** 
 
 ** 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 34 
 
 ** 
 
 * 
 
 3S 
 
 '* 
 
 ** 
 
 * 
 
 i 
 
 
 48 
 
 \2 
 
 i 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 3| 
 
 10 
 
 ? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 41 
 
 ** 
 
 '* 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 <* 
 
 t 
 
 4'd 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 OB 
 
 " 
 
 
 Fig. 44. Wiring of an Office Building. Plan of Second Floor. Rear Portion Occupied a 
 a Composing and Linotype Room. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 61 
 
 SCHEDULE OF CIRCUITS 
 
 
 su 
 
 PL 
 
 P- 
 
 ED 
 
 s 
 
 
 TOT 
 
 AL 
 
 i-OP. 
 
 d 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
 Z 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 OUTLETS 
 SUPPLIED 
 
 |j 
 
 LIGHTS 
 
 AT WHA 
 POINT C 
 TROLLE 
 
 I 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 Dcd 
 
 4- 
 
 
 
 TT 
 
 
 
 
 fgV.ijk 
 
 -7 
 
 
 
 TT 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 3Z" 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 <i 
 
 
 
 qrst u. 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 VL1 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 w xy 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 V1L 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 s.' 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 c' 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 e'*' 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 ii 
 
 
 
 Ki'j 1 
 
 -4 
 
 
 
 \2 
 
 ii 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 .4 
 
 
 
 1 "nrVrVo'p'q'r 
 
 -7 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 t' 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 >i 
 
 
 
 V 1 ' 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 ii 
 
 
 
 1 x* 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 1 z.' 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 
 ' b" 
 
 'd 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 2O 
 
 41 
 
 
 
 e-fg-K'i 11 
 
 fci 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 41 
 
 
 
 _ X" 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 SafA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fe4 
 
 46 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 m" n" 
 
 2 
 
 
 Sat B 
 
 24 
 
 li 
 
 
 
 o" 
 
 1 
 
 
 S *' " 
 
 25 
 
 ii 
 
 
 
 p'cfr" 
 
 3 
 
 
 S *' " 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 45. Wiring of an Office Building. 
 
 Typical Plan of Upper Floors, Showing Circuit Work, Schedule, etc. All the Floors above 
 
 the Second are Similar to One Another in Plan, Differing Only in Comparatively 
 
 Unimportant Details of Partitions. 
 
CABLES. 
 
 FIXTURES. 
 
 * EMPTY CONDUIT ONLY 
 
 SEiCTON 
 
 BOX FOR TlCKERSJvCSSENGER 
 
 OO.LS.ETCo 
 
 4 Of IKTURCOWCCTION 
 BOX fUft TELCPHONCS.BELl. 
 CAO5.ETC. 
 
 ; 
 
 -::. 
 
 BOXES. 
 
 ^aREOUWroOF VAR.OUS ' 
 
 Fig. 46. Wiring of an Office Building. Diagram of the Interconnection System. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 63 
 
 basement; adjoining this main box is located the terminal box of the 
 local telephone company. A separate system of feeders is provided 
 for the ticker system, as these conductors require somewhat heavier 
 insulation, and it was thought inadvisable to place them in the same 
 conduits with the telephone wires, owing to the higher potential of 
 ticker circuits. A separate interconnection cable runs to each floor, 
 for telephone and messenger call purposes; and a central box is placed 
 near the rising point at each floor, from which run subsidiary cables 
 to several points symmetrically located on the various floors. From 
 these subsidiary boxes, wires can be run to the various offices requiring 
 telephone or other service. Small pipes are provided to serve as race- 
 ways from office to office, so as to avoid cutting partitions. In this 
 way, wires can be quickly provided for any office in the building with- 
 out damaging the building in any way whatever; and, as provision is 
 made for a special wooden moulding near the ceiling to accommodate 
 these wires, they can be run around the room without disfiguring the 
 walls. All the main cables and subsidiary wires are connected with 
 special interconnection blocks numbered serially; and a schedule is 
 provided in the main interconnection box in the basement, which 
 enables any wire originating thereat, to be readily and conveniently 
 traced throughout the building. All the main cables and subsidiary 
 cables are run in iron conduits. 
 
 OUTLET=BOXES, CUT-OUJ PANELS, AND 
 OTHER ACCESSORIES 
 
 Outlet-Boxes. Before the introduction of iron conduits, outlet- 
 boxes were considered unnecessary, and with a few exceptions were 
 not used, the conduits being brought to the outlet and cut off after the 
 walls and ceilings were plastered. With the introduction of iron con- 
 duits, however, the necessity for outlet-boxes was realized; and the 
 Rules of the Fire Underwriters were modified so as to require their use. 
 The Rules of the National Electric Code now require outlet-boxes to 
 be used with rigid iron and flexible steel conduits, and with armored 
 cables. A portion of the rule requiring their use is as follows : 
 
 All interior conduits and armored cables "must be equipped at every 
 outlet with an approved outlet-box or plate. 
 
 "Outlet-plates must not be used where it is practicable to install outlet- 
 boxes. 
 
64 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 "In buildings already constructed, where the conditions are such that 
 neither outlet-box nor plate can be installed, these appliances may be omitted 
 by special permission of the inspection department having jurisdiction, pro- 
 viding the conduit ends are bushed and secured." 
 
 Fig. 47 shows a typical form of outlet-box for bracket or ceiling 
 outlets of the universal type. When it is desired to make an opening 
 for the conduits, a blow from a hammer 
 will remove any of the weakened portion 
 of the wall of the outlet-box, as may be re- 
 quired. This form of outlet-box is fre- 
 quently referred to as the knock-out type. 
 Other forms of outlet-boxes are made with 
 the openings cast in the box at the re- 
 quired points, this class being usually 
 stronger and better made than the univer- 
 sal type. The advantages of the universal 
 type of outlet-box are that one form of box will serve for any ordinary 
 conditions, the openings being made according to the number of 
 conduits and the directions in which they enter the box. 
 
 Fig. 48 shows a waterproof form of outlet-box used out of doors, 
 or in other places where the conditions require the use of a water- 
 tight and waterproof outlet-box. 
 
 It will be seen in this case, that the box is threaded for the con- 
 
 Fig. 47. Universal and 
 
 Knock-Out Type of 
 
 Outlet Box. 
 
 OD 
 
 Fig. 48. Water-Tight Outlet Box. 
 Courtesy of H. Krantz Manufacturing Co., Brooklyn, N. 1 . 
 
 duits, and that the cover is screwed on tightly and a flange provided 
 for a rubber gasket. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 65 
 
 Figs. 49 and 50 show water-tight floor boxes which are for outlets 
 located in the floor. While the rules do not require that the floor outlet- 
 box shall be water-tight, it is strongly recommended that a water- 
 tight outlet be used in all cases for floor connections. In this case 
 also, the conduit opening is threaded, as well as the stem cover through 
 which the extension is made in the conduit to the desk or table. When 
 the floor outlet connection is not required, the stem cover may be 
 removed and a flat, blank cover be used to replace the same. 
 
 A form of outlet-box used for flexible steel cables and steel ar- 
 mored cable, has already been shown (see Fig. 5). 
 
 There is hardly any limit to the number and variety of makes of 
 outlet-boxes on the market, adapted for ordinary and for special con- 
 
 Fig. 49. 
 
 Types of Floor Outlet-Boxes. 
 
 Fig. 50. 
 
 ditions; but the types illustrated in these pages are characteristic and 
 typical forms. 
 
 Bushings. The Rules of the National Electric Code require that 
 conduits entering junction-boxes, outlet-boxes, or cut-out cabinets 
 shall be provided with approved bushings, fitted to protect the wire 
 from abrasion. 
 
 Fig. 51 shows a typical form of conduit bushing. This bushing 
 is screwed on the end of the conduit after the latter has been intro- 
 duced into the outlet-box, cut-out cabinet, etc., thereby forming an 
 insulatec[ orifice to protect the wire at the point where it leaves the 
 conduits, and to prevent abrasion, grounds, short circuits, etc. A 
 lock-nut (Fig. 52) is screwed on the threaded end of the conduit before 
 the conduit is placed in the outlet-box or cut-out cabinet, and this 
 lock-nut and bushing clamp the ronduH securely in position. Fig. 
 
66 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Fig. 51. Conduit Bushing. 
 
 53 shows a terminal bushing for panel-boxes used for flexible steel 
 conduit or armored cable. 
 
 The Rules of the National Electric Code require that the metal 
 of conduits shall be permanently and effectually grounded, so as to 
 
 insure a positive 
 connection for 
 grounds or leak- 
 ing currents, and 
 in order to pro- 
 vide a path of 
 least resistance 
 to prevent the 
 current from 
 finding a path 
 
 through any source which might cause a fire. At outlet-boxes, the 
 conduits and gaspipes must be fastened in such a manner as to 
 insure good electrical connection; and at centers of distribution, 
 the conduits should be joined by suitable bond 
 wires, preferably of copper, the said bond wires 
 being connected to the metal structure of the 
 building, or, in case of a building not having 
 an iron or steel structure, being grounded in a 
 permanent manner to water or gas piping. 
 Fuse-Boxes, Cut-Out Panels, etc. From the very outset, the 
 necessity was apparent of having a protective device in circuit with 
 the conductor to protect it from overload, short circuits, etc. For 
 this purpose, a fusible 
 metal having a low 
 melting point was em- 
 ployed. The form of 
 this fuse has varied 
 greatly. Fig. 54 shows 
 
 ohar^ctpristiV form 
 
 of what is known as 
 
 the link fuse with copper terminals, on which are stamped the ca- 
 
 pacity of the fuse. 
 
 The form of fuse used probably to a greater extent than any other, 
 although it is now being superseded by other more modern forms, 
 
 Fig. 52. Lock-Nut. 
 
 Fig. 53. Panel-Box Terminal Bushing. 
 Courtesy of Sprague Electric Co., New York, N. 1. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 67 
 
 is that known as the Edison fuse-plug, shown in Fig. 55. A porcelain 
 cut-out block used with the Edison fuse is shown in Fig. 56. 
 
 Within the last four or five years, a new form of fuse, known as 
 the enclosed fuse, has been introduced and used to a considerable 
 
 Fig. 54. Copper-Tipped Fuse Link. 
 
 Fig. 55. Edison Fuse-Plug, 
 Courtesy of 'General Electric Co., Schenectady.N. Y. 
 
 Fig. 56. Porcelain Cut-Out Block. 
 
 Courtesy ofGeneralElectricCo., 
 
 Schenectady, Jf. Y. 
 
 extent. A fuse of this type is shown in Fig. 57. Fig. 58 gives a sec- 
 tional view of this fuse, showing the porous filling surrounding the 
 fuse-strips, and also the device for indicating when the fuse has 
 blown. This form of fuse is made with various kinds of terminals; 
 
 it can be used with spring clips in small 
 sizes, and with a post screw contact in 
 larger sizes. For ordinary low potentials 
 this fuse is desirable for currents up to 
 25 amperes; but it is a debatable ques- 
 tion whether it is desirable to use an en- 
 closed fuse for heavier currents. Fig. 59 
 shows a cut-out box with Edison plug 
 fuse-blocks used with knob and tube wiring. It will be seen that 
 there is no connection compartment in this fuse-box, as the circuits 
 enter directly opposite the terminals with which they connect. 
 
 Fig. 60 shows a cut-out panel adapted for enclosed fuses, and 
 installed in a cab- 
 inet having a con- 
 nection compart- 
 ment. As will be 
 seen from the cut, 
 the tablet itself is 
 surrounded on the 
 
 Fig. 58. Section of Enclosed Fuse. 
 
 four sides by slate, 
 
 which is secured in the corners by angle-irons. The outer box may 
 be of wood lined with sheet iron, or it may be of iron. Fig. 61 
 shows a door and trim for a cabinet of this type. It will be seen that 
 
 Fig. 57. Enclosed or "Cartridge" Fuse. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 i i 
 
 the door opens only on the center panel, and that the trim covers and 
 conceals the connection compartment. The inner side of the door 
 should be lined with slate, and the inner side of the trim should be 
 lined with sheet iron. Fig. 62 shows a sectional view of the cabinet 
 and panel. In this type of cabinet, the conduits may enter at any 
 
 point, the wires being 
 run to the proper con- 
 nectors in the connection 
 compartment. 
 
 Figs. 63 and 64 illus- 
 trate a type of panel- 
 board and cabinet hav- 
 ing a push-button switch 
 connected with each 
 branch circuit and so 
 arranged that the cut- 
 out panel itself may be 
 enclosed by locked doors, 
 and access to the switches 
 may be obtained through 
 two separate doors pro- 
 vided with latches only. 
 This type of panel was arranged and designed by the author of this 
 instruction paper. 
 
 OVERHEAD LINEWORK 
 
 The advantages of overhead linework as compared with under- 
 ground linework are that it is much less expensive; it is more readily 
 and more quickly installed ; and it can be more readily inspected and 
 repaired. 
 
 Its principal disadvantages are that it is not so permanent as 
 underground linework; it is more easily deranged; and it is more 
 unsightly. 
 
 For large cities, and in congested districts, overhead linework 
 should not be used. However, the question of first cost, the question 
 of permanence, and the municipal regulations, are usually the factors 
 which determine whether overhead or underground linework shall 
 be used. 
 
 : 
 
 Fig. 59. Porcelain Cut-Outs in Wooden Box. 
 Courtesy of H. T. Paiste Co., Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 The principal factors to be considered in overhead linework will 
 be briefly outlined. 
 
 Placing of Poles. As a general rule, the poles should be set from 
 100 to 125 feet apart, which is equivalent to 53 to 42 poles per mile. 
 Under certain conditions, these spacings given will have to be modified ; 
 but if the poles are spaced too far apart, there is danger of too great 
 a strain on the poles themselves, and on the cross-arms, pins, and 
 
 Fig. 60. Plan View, Cover, and 
 Section of Double Cut-Out Box. Fig. 61. 
 
 conductors. If, on the other hand, 
 they are placed too close together, 
 the cost is unnecessarily increased. 
 The size and number of conduct- 
 ors, and the potential of the line- Fig. 62. 
 work, determine to a great extent 
 
 the distance between the poles; the smaller the size, the less the num- 
 ber of conductors; and the lower the potential, the greater the distance 
 between the poles may be made. Of course, the exact location of 
 the poles is subject to variation because of trees, buildings, or other 
 obstructions. The usual method employed in locating poles, is first 
 to make a map on a fairly large scale, showing the course of the line- 
 work, and then to locate the poles en the ground according tc the actual 
 conditions. 
 
70 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Poles. Poles should be of selected quality of chestnut or cedar, 
 and should be sound and free from cracks, knots, or other flaws. 
 Experience has proven that chestnut and cedar poles are the most 
 durable and best fitted for linework. If neither chestnut nor cedar 
 poles can be obtained, northern pine may be used, and even other 
 timber in localities where these poles cannot be obtained; but it is 
 found that the other woods do not last so long as those mentioned, 
 
 Pig. 63. Cut-Otit Panel with Push-Button Switches. Cover Removed. 
 
 and some of the other woods are not only less strong initially, but are 
 apt to rot much quicker at the "wind and water line" that is, just 
 above and below the surface of the ground. 
 
 The proper height of pole to be used depends upon conditions. 
 In country and suburban districts, a pole of 25 to 30 feet is usually 
 of sufficient height, unless there are more than two or three cross-arms 
 required. In more densely populated districts and in cities where a 
 great number of cross-arms are required, the poles may have to be 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 71 
 
 40 to 60 feet, or even longer. Of course, the longer the pole, the 
 greater the possibility of its breaking or bending; and as the length 
 increases, the diameter of the butt end of pole should also increase. 
 Table XI gives the average diameters required for various heights of 
 poles, and the depth the poles should be placed in the ground. These 
 data have been compiled from a number of standard specifications. 
 
 TABLE XI 
 
 Pole Data 
 
 LENGTH OF POLE 
 
 DIAMETER 6 IN. 
 FROM BUTT 
 
 DIAMETER AT Top 
 
 DEPTH POLE SHOULD 
 BE PLACED IN 
 GROUND 
 
 25 feet 
 
 9 to 10 in. 
 
 6 to 8 in. 
 
 5 feet 
 
 30 
 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 35 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 
 5| 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 45 
 
 
 14 
 
 
 
 
 6^ 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 16 to 17 
 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 60 
 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 
 7* 
 
 
 65 
 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 70 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 75 
 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 80 
 
 
 22 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 As it is somewhat difficult, because of irregularities in size, to measure the diame- 
 ter of some poles, the circumference may be measured instead: then, by multiplying 
 the diameters given in the above table, by 3,1416, the measurements may be reduced 
 to the circumference in inches. 
 
 The minimum diameters of the pole at the top, which should be 
 allowed, will depend largely on the size of the conductors used, and 
 on the potential carried by the circuits; the larger the conductors 
 and the higher the potentials, the greater should be the diameter at 
 the top of the pole. 
 
 Poles should be shaved, housed, and -gained, also cleaned and 
 ready for painting, before erection. 
 
 Poles should usually be painted, not only for the sake of appear- 
 ance, but also in order to preserve them from the weather. It is par- 
 ticularly important that they should be protected at their butt end, not 
 only where they are surrounded by the ground, but for a foot or two 
 above the ground, as it is at this point that poles usually deteriorate 
 most rapidly. Painting is not so satisfactory at this point as the us6 
 of tar, pitch, or creosote. The life of the pole can be increased con 
 siderably by treating it with one or another of these preservatives. 
 
72 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Before any poles are erected, they should be closely inspected for 
 flaws and for crookedness or too great departure from a straight line. 
 Where appearance is of considerable importance, octagonal poles 
 may be used, although these cost considerably more than round poles. 
 Gains or notches for the cross-arms should be cut in the poles before 
 they are erected, and should be cut square with the axis of the pole, 
 and so that the cross-arms will fit snugly and tightly within the space 
 thus provided. These gains should be not less than 4J inches wide, 
 
 Fig. 64. Cut-Out Panel with Push-Button Switches. With Cover. 
 
 nor less than J inch deep. Gains should not be placed closer than 24 
 inches between centers, and the top gains should be at least 9 inches 
 from the apex of the pole. 
 
 Pole Guying. Where poles are subject to peculiar strains due 
 to unusual stress of the wires, such as at corners, etc., guys should be 
 employed to counteract the strain and to prevent the pole from being 
 bent and finally broken, or from being pulled from its proper position. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 73 
 
 Where there are a consider- 
 able number of wires on the poles, 
 or in case of unusually long 
 poles, or where the linework is 
 subject to severe storms, it is 
 frequently necessary to guy the 
 poles even on straight linework. 
 In such cases, the guys should 
 extend from a point near the top 
 of the pole to a point near the 
 butt of the adjacent pole. 
 Straight guying should also be 
 employed at the terminal pole, 
 the guy extending to a stub 
 beyond the last pole, to counter- 
 act the strain of the wires pull- 
 ing in the opposite direction. On 
 particularly heavy lines, it is 
 sometimes necessary to use 
 straight guys for the second and 
 even the third pole from the ter- 
 minal pole, to prevent undue 
 strain on the terminal pole itself, 
 as shown in Fig. 65. 
 
 Where there are three or 
 more cross-arms, either two sets 
 of guys should be employed, or 
 else a "Y" form of guy should 
 be used. If a single guy is used 
 on a long pole or on a pole car- 
 rying a number of cross-arms, or 
 on which there is unusual strain, 
 the pole is apt to break where 
 the guy is attached. Figs. 66 and 
 67 show respectively a proper and 
 an improper method of guying, 
 and their effect. 
 
74 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 At corners, or wherever the direction of the linework changes, 
 guys should be provided to counteract the strain due to the change in 
 direction. Guys are also necessary at points where poles are set in 
 other than a vertical position. 
 
 Where the soil is not firm or solid, or where poles are subject to 
 unusual stress, it is sometimes necessary to obtain additional stiffness 
 by what is known as crib-bracing, as may be seen from Fig. 68. This 
 consists of placing two short logs at the butt of the pole. These 
 logs need not be more than 4 to 5 feet long, or more than 8 to 9 inches 
 
 Fig. 66. Proper Method of Guying where there are Three or More Cross- Arms. 
 A Y-form of Guy is Used at Left; Double Guy at Right. 
 
 in diameter. This crib-bracing is sometimes also necessary to give 
 greater stability to stubs or short poles to which guys are fastened. 
 
 W r hile, as a rule, it is not advisable to use trees for guy supports, 
 it is sometimes necessary to do this, but the trees should be sound and 
 should be protected in a proper manner from injury. On private 
 property, permission should first be obtained from the owner to use 
 the tree for such purpose. 
 
 The guy itself should be of standard cable, consisting of 7 strands 
 of No. 12 B. & S. Gauge iron or steel wire. This is the standard 
 guy cable, and should be used in all cases, except for very light poles 
 and light linework, where a smaller cable having a minimum diameter 
 of \ inch may be used. The guy wires should be fastened at the ends 
 by means of suitable clamps. All guy cables and clamps should be 
 heavily galvanized, to prevent rusting, 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 75 
 
 Corners. In cases of heavy linework where there are a con- 
 siderable number of wires and cross-arms, the turns should be made, 
 
 Fig. 67. Improper Method of Guying where there are Three or More Cross-Arms. 
 Strain is Concentrated at one Point, Causing Rupture of Pole. 
 
 if possible, by the use of two poles. In cases where there are only a 
 few wires, a double cross-arm may be employed, using a single pole. 
 The two methods are illustrated in Figs. 69 and 70. 
 
 Fig. 68. Additional Stiffness Secured by Use of Crib-Bracing. 
 
 Cross-Arms. Cross-arms, where possible, should be of long 
 leaf yellow pine, or of Oregon or Washington fir, of sound wood, 
 
76 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 thoroughly seasoned and free from sap, cracks, cr large knots. They 
 should be not less than 3J inches thick by 4J inches deep, the length 
 depending upon the number of pins required. 
 
 Cross-arms, after being properly seasoned, should be painted 
 with two coats of lead paint before erection. They should then be 
 snugly fitted into the gain of the pole, and securely fastened with 
 a bolt not less than f inch in 
 diameter driven through a 
 hole of slightly less diameter 
 previously bored in the pole. 
 A galvanized-iron washer 
 not less than 2 inches 
 diameter should be placed 
 under the head and nut of 
 
 Fig. 69. Two-Poles Used in Making Turn 
 on Heavy Line. 
 
 each bolt. The cross- 
 arms should be at right 
 angles to the pole, and 
 should be parallel to one 
 another where two or 
 more arms are used on 
 the same pole. 
 
 The cross-arms 
 should be braced with 
 
 galvanized-iron braces approximately 1J inches wide, \ inch thick, 
 and from 18 to 30 inches in length. The braces should be fastened 
 to the cross-arm by means of f-inch galvanized-iron bolts passing 
 through the brace and the cross-arm, washers being used under the 
 nut and head of each bolt. Guys should be provided for the cross- 
 arms in case of unusual strain. The dimensions of cross-arms re- 
 quired for various numbers of pins, are given verv completely in a 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 77 
 
 O 
 
 LJ 
 
 paper read by Mr. Paul Spencer before the Atlantic City Convention 
 of the National Electric Light Association in 1906, and reprinted 
 in a number of the technical journals. 
 
 Wherever practicable, cross-arms should be placed on the poles 
 before the poles are erected, as not only can they be more securely 
 fastened when the poles are on the ground, but the cost of erection 
 is thereby considerably reduced. 
 
 Pins. Pins should be of selected locust, not less than f inch 
 diameter at the shank portion, and not less than 1 J inches in diameter 
 at the point where 
 they rest upon the 
 cross-arm. For po- 
 tentials of 20,000 
 volts or over, the 
 pins should be of ( 
 metal, to avoid car- 
 bonization of the ( 
 wood due to static 
 leakage. The top 
 portion of the pin 
 (if of wood) should 
 be not less than one 
 inch in diameter. 
 The length of both 
 the shank and the 
 upper portion Fig>70> 
 should be each ap- 
 proximately 4J inches, making the total length approximately 9 
 inches. The pin should be threaded and tapered, and accurately cut. 
 The pin should fit the hole in the cross-arm snugly, and should be 
 nailed to the cross-arm with a sixpenny galvanized-iron wire nail 
 driven straight through the center of the shank of the pin. 
 
 Insulators. For potentials of 3,000 volts or less, insulators 
 should be of flint glass, of double-petticoat, deep-grooved type. For 
 potentials of over 3,000 volts, they should be of the triple-petticoat 
 type, and preferably of porcelain, and should be of special pattern 
 adapted for the potential. 
 
 Service Mains, Pole Wiring, etc. For service connections- 
 
 Double Cross-Arm Used on Single Pole to Make Turn 
 in Heavy Line Carrying Only a Few Wires. 
 
78 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 that is, for the mains run to service switches in consumers' residences 
 or other buildings, conductors of not less than No. 8 B. & S. Gauge 
 should be used in order to obtain the necessary tensile strength. 
 Where possible, the circuits should be arranged in such a manner as to 
 have the service main connect with the line on the lowest cross-arm, 
 in order to prevent crossing of wires. The transformers should be 
 installed either on poles or in vaults outside of the building, or, where 
 this is impracticable, in a fireproof vault or other enclosed space 
 inside of the building itself. Small transformers may be fastened to 
 a pair of cross-arms secured to the pole itself. For transformers of 
 25 K. W. and over, it is usually best to provide special poles. It is 
 inadvisable to place transformers on building walls. 
 
 Where appearance is of importance, when the transformer is 
 placed underground, or when the wires enter the lower portion of a 
 building, the conductors must be run underground. In such cases, a 
 splice should be made between the weatherproof conductors and 
 rubber-insulated lead-sheathed conductors, at a height of about 15 
 to 20 feet above the ground, and the mains run in iron pipe down the 
 pole to a point underground, where they may be continued either in 
 iron pipe or in vitrified or fiber conduits underground to the point 
 of entrance. 
 
 All circuit wiring on poles should be so arranged as to leave one 
 side free for the linemen to climb the poles without injuring the con- 
 ductors. As a rule, all poles on which transformers, lightning arresters, 
 or fuse-boxes are located, should be provided with steps. 
 
 In order to limit the area of disturbance of a short circuit or 
 overload, fuses should be inserted in each leg of a primary circuit 
 in making connections to transformers, or where tap or branch con- 
 nections are made. The fuses should have a capacity of approxi- 
 mately 50 per cent greater than the transformer or conductor which 
 they protect. Of course, it would be undesirable to have an excessive 
 number of fuses, and for short branch lines they might frequently 
 be undesirable; but for important branch lines, they should be em- 
 ployed in order to prevent the fuse on the main feeder from being 
 blown in case of disturbance en the branch line. 
 
 Lightning arresters should be placed on the linework in places 
 particularly exposed to lightning discharges, and at all points where 
 connections are made to enter a building. The location and number 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 79 
 
 of lightning arresters will depend upon local conditions, the likelihood 
 and frequency of thunderstorms, etc. Where lightning arresters are 
 provided, it is essential that a 
 good ground connection be obtained. 
 The ground connection should be 
 made by a fairly good-sized insu- 
 lated rubber conductor, not less 
 than No. 6 B. & S. Gauge, con- 
 necting either with a water pipe 
 to which it should be clamped, or 
 fastened in such a manner as to 
 obtain a good electric contact, or 
 else to a ground-plate of copper 
 embedded in crushed charcoal or 
 coke. 
 
 The neutral wire of a three- 
 wire of both secondary alternating- 
 current systems and direct-current 
 systems, should be properly 
 
 Fig. 71. Method of Wiring to and Sup- 
 porting Lamp on Pole. 
 
 grounded as required by the National Electric Code (see Rules 12, 
 13, and 13-A). 
 
 Lamps on Poles. Fig. 71 shows the method of wiring to and 
 supporting a lamp located on a pole. 
 
 UNDERGROUND LINEWORK 
 
 In large cities, or in congested districts, or where the appearance 
 of overhead linework is objectionable, it is generally necessary to 
 place the conductors underground instead of overhead. 
 
 The advantages of underground linework are first, that of 
 appearance; second, it is more permanent and less liable to inter- 
 ruption than overhead work. 
 
 The principal disadvantage of underground work is the greater 
 first cost. In overhead linework, conductors having weatherproof 
 insulators consisting of cotton dipped in a special compound similar 
 to pitch, are used, the cost of which is relatively small. For under- 
 ground linework, however, the conductors must not only have rubber 
 insulation, but also a lead sheathing for mechanical protection. 
 
80 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Furthermore, the cost of the ducts, trenching, concrete work, laying 
 the ducts, etc., is much greater than the cost of poles, cross-arms, etc. 
 
 As in the case of inside wiring, underground linework should 
 be so arranged that the conductors may be readily removed and re- 
 placed without disturbing the underground conduits or ducts. The 
 system should be arranged with manholes, and in such a manner that 
 changes or additions or branches may be readily and conveniently 
 made. In order to provide for the removal and replacing of con- 
 ductors, and also for growth in the system, the method formerly in 
 vogue, of embedding the conductors in wooden boxes, or in trenches 
 underground, has been abandoned; and the conductors are now 
 placed in conduits or ducts. A number of different forms of ducts and 
 conduits have been introduced, some of which have been dropped as 
 cheaper and better forms have been introduced. The forms of con- 
 duits or ducts now most generally employed include iron pipe, vitrified 
 conduits, and fibre conduit. As all three of these forms of conduit 
 are very generally employed, they will now be described, as well as the 
 method of installing them. 
 
 Iron Pipe. Three-inch iron conduit is frequently used for under- 
 ground linework, particularly for short runs or where there are not 
 more than two or three ducts required, or where the soil is bad and 
 where the longer lengths and more stable joints of the iron conduit 
 would make it more desirable than vitrified duct or fibre conduit. 
 This conduit, however, is generally undesirable on account of its 
 greater first cost, and also on account of its liability to deterioration 
 from rust or corrosion. Where iron conduit is used, and where it is 
 subject to corrosion, it should be coated with asphaltum or other 
 similar protective composition. While it is not necessary to have a 
 concrete bed under iron pipe, it is better to provide such a bed, especi- 
 ally where the soil is shifting or not solid. 
 
 Vitrified Tile Conduit. This type of conduit in both the single- 
 and multiple-duct form, is used more extensively than any other form 
 of conduit for underground work. It is made in lengths of 18 inches 
 for the single-duct form, and in considerably greater lengths in the 
 multiple-duct form. Fig. 72 shows the single-duct conduit, and 
 Fig. 73 shows a multiple-duct form of conduit. 
 
 Vitrified conduit requires less space for the same number of 
 ducts than any other form, and is particularly desirable where a great 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 81 
 
 number of ducts are required in a small space. The advantages of 
 this form of conduit are that it is cheap in first cost; after being 
 laid, it is practically indestructible; it is not subject to corrosion or 
 
 Fig. 72. Self-Centering Duct, 
 
 Vitrified Conduit. 
 
 Courtesy of Standard Vitrified Conduit Co., 
 New York, N. Y. 
 
 Fig. 73. Multiple Duct, Vitrified 
 
 Conduit. 
 
 Courtesy of Standard Vitrified Conduit Co., 
 New York, N. Y. 
 
 deterioration; it is not combustible; it is fairly strong mechanically; 
 and it does not require skilled labor to install. 
 
 Table XII gives the principal data of one of the well-known 
 makes of vitrified conduit 
 
 TABLE XII 
 Standard Vitrified Conduit 
 
 STYLE OF CONDUIT 
 
 DIMENSION 
 OF SQUARE 
 DUCT 
 (INCHES) 
 
 DIMENSION 
 OF ROUND 
 DUCT 
 (INCHES) 
 
 OUTSIDE 
 DIMENSIONS 
 OF END SEC- 
 TION (!N.) 
 
 REG. 
 STOCK 
 LENGTHS 
 
 (INCHES) 
 
 SHORT 
 LENGTHS 
 (INCHES) 
 
 APPROX. 
 WEIGHT 
 
 PERDUCT 
 
 (FOOT) 
 
 2-ducfc multiple. . . 
 3-duct multiple. . . 
 4-duct multiple. . . 
 6-duct multiple. . . 
 9-duct multiple. . . 
 Common single 
 duct 
 
 3| sq. 
 3| sq. 
 3f sq. 
 3f sq. 
 3f sq. 
 
 COCOCOCOCO CO CO CO 
 
 f 
 \ 
 
 5x 9 
 5x13 
 9x 9 
 9x 13 
 13x 13 
 
 5x5 
 5x5 
 5 in. round 
 
 24 
 24 
 36 
 38 
 36 
 
 18 
 18 
 18 
 
 6, 9, 12 
 6,9, 12 
 6, 9, 12 
 6,9, 12 
 6,9, 12 
 
 6,9, 12 
 6,9, 12 
 6,9, 12 
 
 0000000000 00 O O 
 1 I 1 I 
 
 Single duct, self- 
 centering 
 
 Round single duct, 
 self-centering. . . 
 
 In installing vitrified conduit, a trench following as straight 
 lines as possible should be dug to such a depth that there will be a 
 space of at least 18 inches from the top layer of the duct to the street 
 surface. The bottom of the trench should be level; and a bed of 
 good cement concrete not less than 3 inches thick should be laid. 
 The following instructions* for installing vitrified conduit may be 
 considered as typical of the best up-to-date practice: 
 
 *From the Catalogue of the Standard Underground Conduit Company. 
 
82 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 Laying of Conduit. When the trench has been properly pre- 
 pared and the concrete foundation set, the laying of conduit should be 
 begun. The ends of the conduit should be butted against the shoulder 
 of the conduit terminal brick; short length should be used for the 
 breaking of joints. 
 
 Care should be taken, when each length of conduit is laid, that 
 the duct hole is perfectly clear and the conduit level. The work may 
 then proceed; and if the following instructions are carried out, no 
 difficulty will be encountered after the duct are laid. 
 
 When the first piece of conduit is laid and the keys inserted, 
 one on the top and one on the side of the duct, the burlap for joints 
 should be slipped partly under the conduit, and the next piece brought 
 up and connected. The burlap is then brought up and wrapped 
 around the conduit. After this operation is completed, a thin layer 
 of cement mortar is plastered around the burlap, extending over the 
 edges, so as to cover the scarified portion of the conduit so that it 
 may adhere to it, thus making the joint practically water-tight. 
 
 The burlap should be first prepared in strips of not less than 6 
 inches in width, and of suitable length to wrap around the conduit, 
 overlapping about 6 inches. If possible, the burlap should be satur- 
 ated in asphaltum or pitch; but if this is not convenient, it may be 
 dipped in water so as to stick to the conduit until the joint has been 
 cemented. The engineer or foreman in charge should personally 
 oversee the making of the joint, and especially see that the keys are 
 inserted, as in many instances they are left out by the workmen, 
 causing considerable trouble and expense. Sufficient time should be 
 allowed for the joints to harden. 
 
 After the duct are laid, the sides are filled in with either concrete 
 or dirt, as specified, care being taken that the conduit are not forced 
 out of alignment by the careless filling-in of the sides. The top layer 
 of concrete may then be laid and leveled. 
 
 After this the trench is ready for filling in. 
 
 In the laying of our self-centering single-duct conduit, no dowel- 
 pins are used, the ducts being self-centering one piece of conduit 
 socketing into the other. Burlaping and cementing of joint is not 
 necessary. Otherwise the instructions for the laying of multiple- 
 duct should be followed. The use of a mandrel in laying self- 
 centering conduit is superfluous. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 83 
 
 As each section of the system that is, from manhole to man- 
 hole is completed, it should be rodded to insure the duct being clear. 
 For this purpose wooden rods are employed, the rods being from 
 3 to 4 feet long by one inch in diameter and provided with brass 
 couplings on the ends. The first rod is pushed into the duct chamber, 
 the second one is then attached, and then the third and so on, until the 
 first rod appears in the manhole at the opposite end, 
 
 A wooden mandrel about 10 inches long, made to conform to 
 the shape of the duct, but about J inch smaller in diameter, is attached 
 to the last rod, and a galvanized -iron wire is then attached to the other 
 end of the mandrel. The rods are drawn through the duct and 
 uncoupled, until the mandrel has passed through the ducts. The 
 wire is left remaining in the chamber, and secured in the manhole to 
 prevent its being pulled out. The same operation is repeated until 
 all the ducts are tested and wired. Should obstructions be met with 
 and the mandrel bind, the location of the obstructions can readily be 
 ascertained from the length of rod yet remaining in the duct, and can 
 easily be removed. This method is far better than pulling the 
 mandrel through as the ducts are laid, as in many cases the duct is 
 obstructed or thrown out of alignment by the filling-in of the con- 
 crete or trench, and this would not be noticed until an attempt was 
 made to draw the cable. The wire left in the duct is used in drawing 
 the cables. 
 
 Fibre Conduit. This type of conduit consists of wood fibre 
 formed into a tube over a mandrel under pressure. After the tube 
 
 Fig. 74. Socket-Joint Fibre Conduit. 
 
 is formed on the mandrel, it is removed, and, after being dried in 
 air, is placed in a tank of preservative and insulating compound. 
 
 Fibre conduits are made in three different styles namely, the 
 socket- joint, sleeve- joint, and screw- joint types, shown respectively in 
 Figs. 74, 75, and 76. The forms of conduit here shown are made by 
 the Fibre Conduit Company, of Orangeburg, New York. 
 
 In the socket-joint type, the connections between the lengths 
 
84 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 of conduit are made by means of male and female joints turned on 
 the ends of the conduit so that it is necessary only to push one length 
 within the other to secure alignment without the use of a sleeve- 
 coupling or other device. While this is the cheapest and simplest 
 
 Fig. 75. Sleeve-Joint Fibre Conduit. 
 
 form of fibre conduit, the joint is not so secure as in either of the other 
 two types. 
 
 The sleeve-joint fibre conduit has the ends of each joint turned 
 so that a sleeve may be slipped over the turned portion and butted up 
 against the shoulder on the tubes. These sleeves are about 4 inches 
 long and f inch thick. While this form of joint is more secure than 
 the socket type, it is not so secure as the screw-joint type. 
 
 The screw-joint type of fibre conduit is manufactured with a 
 slightly thicker wall than the socket-joint type, in order to obtain the 
 necessary thickness for getting the thread on the end of the pipe. The 
 sleeve in this case is threaded; and, instead of being slipped on the 
 conduit, as in the case of the sleeve-joint type, it is screwed on, and 
 the thread may be filled with compound and a water-tight joint thereby 
 obtained. Various special forms of elbows, bends, junction-boxes, 
 tees, etc., are provided for this conduit, for special connections. 
 Couplings are also made so that joints can be made between fibre 
 conduit and iron pipe, where it is desirable to make such a connection. 
 
 The advantages of fibre conduit are -first, that it is lighter than 
 any of the other forms of conduit, which reduces the cost of trans- 
 
 Fig. 76. Screw-Joint Fibre Conduit. 
 
 portation, carting, and handling; and second, that the cost of labor 
 for installing it is less than in the case of iron pipe, and less than that 
 of the single-duct tile pipe. Table XIII edves the principal data 
 relating to fibre conduit, 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 85 
 
 TABLE XIII 
 
 Fibre Conduit 
 
 INSIDE 
 DIAMETER 
 (INCHES) 
 
 TYPE OF CONDUIT 
 
 LENGTH 
 (FEET) 
 
 THICKNESS op 
 WALL, (INCHES) 
 
 APPROX. 
 
 WEIGHT PER 
 FOOT (LBS.) 
 
 1 
 
 Socket -joint 
 
 2-i 
 
 
 
 0.50 
 
 1* 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 0.70 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 J 
 
 
 0.85 
 
 2i 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 1.02 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 1.20 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 1.40 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 1.60 
 
 li 
 
 Sle 
 
 eve-joi 
 
 it 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 0.80 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 0.95 
 
 2| 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 i 
 
 1.15 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 1 7 6 
 
 2.40 
 
 3* 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 A 
 
 2.90 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 J 
 
 3.33 
 
 1* 
 
 Scr 
 
 ew-joir 
 
 t 
 
 5 
 
 I 5 e 
 
 1.00 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 1.45 
 
 2* 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 f 
 
 1.75 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 T 7 6 
 
 2.40 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 TV 
 
 2.90 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 J 
 
 3.33 
 
 Fig. 77 shows the method of laying fibre conduit in a trench. 
 
 A concrete bed should be provided for all three types of fibre 
 conduit. Where the ground is moist or where there is likelihood of 
 water getting in the joints, it is advisable to make a complete envelope 
 around the conduit. 
 
 The joints should be carefully dipped in or coated with a special 
 liquid compound provided for this purpose, so as to insure water- 
 tightness. The cables should be spaced about 1J inches apart, by 
 means of wooden separators; and the spaces between the ducts, and 
 between the walls of the trench and the outer ducts, should be filled 
 with a thin grouting of cement and sand. If more than one horizontal 
 row of ducts are installed, the grouting of each row should be smoothed 
 over so as to prepare a base for the next row of ducts. 
 
 To fish the conductors in fibre conduit, it is not necessary to fol- 
 low the method of rodding usually required with vitrified conduits; 
 but it is found that by utilizing a solid No. 6 iron wire, and fishing 
 from one manhole to the next, the mandrels and brush can be attached 
 to the end of the wire and pulled through the conduits, thus insuring 
 that the joints are smooth and that there are no obstructions in the 
 conduit. To prevent accidental clogging of the ends of the con- 
 
86 
 
 ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 duit, wooden plugs should be installed in the openings of all un- 
 finished conduit work, or in all unoccupied cable ducts at manholes. 
 Drawing In the Cables. After the conduits have been tested by 
 means of the mandrel to ascertain that they are continuous and that 
 the joints are smooth, the work of installing the cables may be started. 
 Special precaution should be taken to prevent sharp bending of the 
 cables, and thus to prevent injury to the lead sheathing of the rubber 
 
 insulation. If the 
 cable is light and 
 of small diam- 
 eter, the distance 
 not over 300 feet, 
 and the run fairly 
 straight, the ca- 
 ble can usually 
 be pulled in by 
 hand; but often 
 other mean s 
 must be provided 
 so as to secure 
 sufficient power. 
 Pr e cautions 
 should be taken, 
 however, to 
 avoid placing too 
 great a strain on 
 the cables, as it 
 is liable to in- 
 jure them, and 
 the injuries may 
 
 not show up immediately, but may cause trouble later. The remedy 
 is to avoid placing the manholes too far apart, and to have the runs as 
 straight as possible; also to properly test the conduits for continuity 
 and smoothness before starting to install the cables. Enough slack 
 should be left in each manhole to allow the cables to pass close to 
 the side walls of the manhole, and to have the centers free and acces- 
 sible for a man to enter the manhole. Where there are a great 
 number of cables in a manhole, shelves or other supports should be 
 
 Fig. 77. Method of Laying Fibre Conduit in Trench. 
 
ELECTRIC WIRING 
 
 87 
 
 provided for holding the cables apart and in position. Where two 
 or more conductors are placed in the same duct, they should always 
 be pulled in at the same time, for otherwise the cables last pulled in 
 are apt to injure those already installed. 
 
 Manholes. Manholes should be provided about every 300 feet, 
 in order to facilitate 
 the installation of the 
 conductors in the duct. 
 The exact distance be- 
 tween manholes 
 should be determined 
 by conditions; in some 
 ?ases they should be 
 placed even closer to- 
 gether than the figure 
 given, while in other 
 cases their distance 
 apart mi gh t be 
 slightly greater. 
 
 Manholes are 
 built of concrete or 
 brick, and provided 
 with a cast-iron frame 
 or cover. The man- 
 holes may be of 
 square, round, rect- 
 angular, or oval sec- 
 tion, the last-men- Fig. 78. 
 tioned form of man- 
 hole being probably the best, as it avoids the liability to sharp bends 
 or kinks being made in the cable. The manhole cover may be of 
 the same form as the manhole itself, or it may be of different form; but 
 round or square covers are usually used. Fig. 78 shows a standard 
 form of manhole used in New York City. This manhole is substan- 
 tially built, and adapted for heavy traffic passing over the cover. For 
 suburban or country work, manholes may be made of lighter con- 
 struction. 
 
 Plan and Sectional Elevation of Standard Form 
 of Manhole Used in New York City. 
 
AERIAL CONSTRUCTION 
 Telephone and Electric Light Wires. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 HISTORY AND DEVELOPMENT 
 
 The history of electric lighting as a commercial proposition begins 
 with the invention of the Gramme dynamo, by Z. J. Gramme, in 
 1870, together with the introduction of the Jablochkoff candle or 
 light, which was first announced to the public in 1876, and which 
 formed a feature of the International Exposition at Paris in 1878. 
 Up to this time, the electric light was known to but few investigators, 
 one of the earliest being Sir Humphrey Davy who, in 1810, produced 
 the first arc of any great magnitude. It was then called the voltaic 
 arc, and resulted from the use of two wood charcoal pencils as elec- 
 trodes and a powerful battery of voltaic cells as a source of current. 
 
 From 1840 to 1859, many patents were taken out on arc lamps, 
 most of them operated by clockwork, but these were not successful, 
 due chiefly to the lack of a suitable source of current, since all de- 
 pended on primary cells for their power. The interest in this form 
 of light died down about 1859, and nothing further was attempted 
 until the advent of the Gramme dynamo. 
 
 The incandescent lamp was but a piece of laboratory apparatus 
 up to 1878, at which time Edison produced a lamp using a platinum 
 spiral in a vacuum, as a source of light, the platinum being rendered 
 incandescent by the passage of an electric current through it. The 
 first successful carbon filament was made in 1879, this filament being 
 formed from strips of bamboo. The names of Edison and Swan are 
 intimately connected with these early experiments. 
 
 From this time on, the development of electric lighting has been 
 very rapid, and the consumption of incandescent lamps alone has 
 reached several millions each year. When we compare the small 
 amount of lighting done by means of electricity twenty-five years ago 
 with the enormous extent of lighting systems and the numerous 
 applications of electric illumination as they are to-day, the growth 
 and development of the art is seen to be very great, and the value of 
 a study of this subject may be readily appreciated. While in many 
 
 Copyright, 1909, by American School of Correspondence. 
 
2 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 cases electricity is not the cheapest source of power for illumination, 
 its admirable qualities and convenience of operation make it by far 
 the most desirable. 
 
 CLASSIFICATION 
 
 The subject of electric lighting may be classified as follows: 
 
 1. The type of lamps used. 
 
 2. The methods of distributing power to the lamps. 
 
 3. The use made of the light, or its application. 
 
 4. Photometry and lamp testing. 
 
 The types of lamps used may be subdivided into: 
 
 1. Incandescent lamps: Carbon, metallic filament; Nernst. 
 
 2. Special lamps: Exhausted bulb without filament, such as the Cooper- 
 Hewitt lamp and Moore tube lamp. 
 
 3. Arc lamps: Ordinary carbon, flaming arc. 
 
 INCANDESCENT LAMPS 
 
 The incandescent lamp is by far the most common type of lamp 
 used, and the principle of its operation is as follows: 
 
 If a current I is sent through a conductor whose resistance is 
 R, for a time t, the conductor is heated, and the heat generated = 
 PR t, PR t representing joules or watt-seconds. 
 
 If the current, material, and conditions are so chosen that the 
 substance may be heated in this way until it gives out light, becomes 
 incandescent, and does not deteriorate too rapidly, we have an in- 
 candescent lamp. Carbon was the first successful material to be 
 chosen for this conductor and for ordinary lamps it is formed into a 
 small thread or filament. Very recently metallic filament lamps 
 have been introduced commercially with great success but the carbon 
 incandescent lamp will continue to be used for some time, especially 
 in the low candle-power units operated at commercial voltages. Car- 
 bon is a successful material for two reasons: 
 
 .1. The material must be capable of standing a very high tem- 
 perature, 1,280 to 1,330 C., or even higher. 
 
 2. It must be a conductor of electricity with a fairly high re- 
 sistance. 
 
 Platinum was used in an early stage of the development, but, 
 as we shall see, its temperature cannot be maintained at a value high 
 enough to make the lamp as efficient as when carbon, or a metal 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 3 
 
 having a melting point higher than that of platinum, is used. Nearly 
 all attempts to substitute another substance in place of carbon have 
 failed until recently, and the few lamps which are entirely or partially 
 successful will be treated later. The nature of the carbon employed 
 in incandescent lamps has, however, been much improved over the 
 first forms, and owing to the still very great importance of this lamp, 
 the method of manufacture will be considered. 
 
 Manufacture of Carbon Incandescent Lamps. Preparation of 
 the Filament. Cellulose, a chemical compound rich in carbon, is 
 prepared by treating absorbent cotton with zinc chloride in proper 
 proportions to form a uniform, gelatine-like mass. It is customary 
 to stir this under a partial vacuum in order to remove bubbles of air 
 which might be contained in it and destroy its uniformity. This 
 material is then forced, "squirted," through steel dies into alcohol, the 
 
 W 
 
 BODE. 
 
 Fig. 1. Fonr.s of Filaments now in Use. 
 
 alcohol serving to harden the soft, transparent threads. These threads 
 are then thoroughly washed to remove all trace of the zinc chloride, 
 dried, cut to the desired lengths, wound on forms, and carbonized by 
 heating to a high temperature away from air. During carbonization, 
 the cellulose is transformed into pure carbon, the volatile matter being 
 driven off by the high temperature to which the filaments are subjected. 
 The material becomes hard and stiff, assuming a permanent form, 
 shrinking in both length and diameter the form being specially con- 
 structed so as to allow for this shrinkage. The forms are made of 
 carbon blocks which are placed in plumbago crucibles and packed 
 with powdered carbon. The crucibles, which are covered with 
 loosely fitting carbon covers, are gradually brought to a white heat, 
 at which temperature the cellulose is changed to carbon, and then 
 allowed to cool. After cooling, the filaments are removed, measured, 
 and inspected, and the few defective ones discarded. 
 
4 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 In the early days, these filaments were made of cardboard or 
 bamboo, and later, of thread treated with sulphuric acid. 
 
 A few of the shapes of filaments now in use are shown in Fig. 1, 
 the different shapes giving a slightly different distribution of light. 
 As here shown they are designated as follows: A, U-shaped; B, 
 single-curl; C, single-curl anchored; D, double-loop; E, double- 
 curl; F, double-curl anchored. 
 
 Mounting the Filament. After carbonization, the filaments 
 are mounted or joined to wires leading into the globe or bulb. These 
 wires are made of platinum platinum being the only substance, so 
 far as known, that expands and contracts the same as glass, with 
 change in temperature and which, at the same time, will not be melted 
 by the heat developed in the carbon. Since the bulb must remain 
 air-tight, a substance expanding at a different rate from the glass 
 cannot 'be used. Several methods of fastening the filament to the 
 leading in wires have been used, such as forming a socket in the end 
 of the wire, inserting the filament, and then squeezing the socket 
 tightly against the carbon; and the use of tiny bolts when cardboard 
 filaments were used; but the pasted joint is now used almost exclu- 
 sively. Finely powdered carbon is mixed with some adhesive com- 
 pound, such as molasses, and this mixture is used as a paste for fasten- 
 ing the carbon to the platinum. Later, when current is sent through 
 the joint, the volatile matter is driven off and only the carbon remains. 
 This makes a cheap and, at the same time, a very efficient joint. 
 
 Flashing. Filaments, prepared and mounted in the manner 
 just described, are fairly uniform in resistance, but it has been found 
 that their quality may be much improved and their resistance very 
 closely regulated by depositing a layer of carbon on the outside of the 
 filament by the process of flashing. By flashing is meant heating the 
 filament to a high temperature when immersed in a hydrocarbon gas, 
 such as gasoline vapor, under partial vacuum. Current is passed 
 through the filament in this process to accomplish the heating. Gas 
 is used, rather than a liquid, to prevent too heavy a deposit of the 
 carbon. Coal gas is not recommended because the carbon, when 
 deposited from this, has a dull black appearance. The effects of 
 flashing are as follows: 
 
 1. The diameter of the filament is increased by the deposited 
 carbon and hence its resistance is decreased. The process must be 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 discontinued when the desired resistance is reached. Any little irregu- 
 larities in the filament will be eliminated since the smaller sections, 
 having the greater resistance, will become hotter than the remainder 
 of the filament and the carbon is deposited more rapidly at these 
 points. 
 
 2. The character of the surface is changed from a dull black 
 and comparatively soft nature to a bright gray coating which is much 
 harder and which increases the life and efficiency of the filament. 
 
 Exhausting. After flashing, the filament is sealed in the bulb 
 and the air exhausted through the tube A in Fig. 2, which shows the 
 lamp in different stages of its 
 manufacture. The exhaustion 
 is accomplished by means of 
 mechanical air pumps, sup- 
 plemented by Sprengle or mer- 
 cury pumps and chemicals. 
 Since the degree of exhaustion 
 must be high, the bulb should 
 be heated during the process 
 so as to drive off any gas which 
 may cling to the glass. When 
 chemicals are used, as is now 
 almost universally the case, the 
 chemical is placed in the tube 
 A and, when heated, serves 
 to take up much of the remain- 
 ing gas. Exhaustion is neces- 
 sary for several reasons: 
 
 1. To avoid oxidization of the filament. 
 
 2. To reduce the heat conveyed to the globe. 
 
 3. To prevent wear on the filament due to currents or eddies in the gas. 
 
 After exhausting, the tube A is sealed off and the lamp com- 
 pleted for testing by attaching the base by means of plaster of Paris. 
 Fig. 3 shows some of the forms of completed incandescent lamps. 
 
 Voltage and Candle=Power. Incandescent lamps of the carbon 
 type vary in size from the miniature battery and candelabra lamps to 
 those of several hundred candle-power, though the latter are very 
 seldom used. The more common values for the candle-power are 
 
 Fig. 2. Different Stages in Lamp Manufacture. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 8, 16, 25, 32, and 50, the choice of candle-power depending on the 
 use to be made of the lamp. 
 
 The voltage will vary depending on the method of distribution 
 of the power. For what is known as parallel distribution, 110 or 
 220 volts are generally used. For the higher values of the voltage, 
 long and slender filaments must be used, if the candle-power is to be 
 low; and lamps of less than 16 candle-power for 220- volt circuits are 
 not practical, owing to difficulty in manufacture. For series dis- 
 tribution, a low voltage and higher current is used, hence the fila- 
 ments may be quite heavy. Battery lamps operate on from 4 to 24 
 volts, but the vast majority of lamps for general illumination are 
 operated at or about 110 volts. 
 
 Fig. 3. Several Forms of Completed Lamps. 
 
 Efficiency. By the efficiency of an incandescent lamp is meant 
 the power required at the lamp terminals per candle-power of light 
 given. Thus, if a lamp giving an average horizontal candle-power 
 of 16 consumes J an ampere at 112 volts, the total number of watts 
 consumed will be 112 X J = 56, and the watts per candle-power 
 will be 56 -f- 16 = 3.5. The efficiency of such a lamp is said to be 
 3.5 watts per candle-power, or simply watts per candle. Watts 
 economy is sometimes used for efficiency. 
 
 The efficiency of a lamp depends on the temperature at which 
 the filament is run. In the ordinary lamp this temperature is between 
 1,280 and 1,330 C, and the curve in Fig. 4 shows the increase of 
 efficiency with the increase of temperature. The temperature attained 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 7 
 
 by a filament depends on the rate at which heat is radiated and the 
 amount of power supplied. The rate of radiation of heat is propor- 
 tional to the area of the filament, the elevation in temperature, and 
 the emissivity of the surface. 
 
 By emissivity is meant the number of heat units emitted from 
 unit surface per degree rise in temperature above that of surrounding 
 bodies. The bright surface of a flashed filament has a lower emis- 
 sivity than the dull surface of an unheated filament, hence less 
 energy is lost in heat radiation and the efficiency of the filament is 
 increased. 
 
 As soon as incandescence is reached, the illumination increases 
 much more rapidly than the emission of heat, hence the increase in 
 
 1400 
 
 3 4 56 78 9 
 
 Fig. 4. Efficiency Curve for Incandescent Lamp. 
 
 10 
 
 efficiency shown in Fig. 4. Were it not for the rapid disintegration 
 of the carbon at high temperature, an efficiency higher than 3.1 watts 
 could be obtained. 
 
 By a special treatment of the carbon filaments, the nature of the 
 carbon is so changed that the filaments may be run at a higher tem- 
 perature and the lamps still have a life comparable to that of the 3.1- 
 watt lamp. Lamps using these special carbon filaments are known 
 as gem metallized filament lamps, or merely as gem lamps, and they 
 will be described more fully later. 
 
 Relation of Life to Efficiency. Ordinary Carbon Lamp. By 
 the useful life of a lamp is meant the length of time a lamp will burn 
 before its candle-power has decreased to such a value that it would 
 be more economical to replace the lamp with a new one than to con- 
 tinue to use it at its decreased value. A decrease to 80% of the initial 
 candle-power of carbon lamps is now taken as the point at which a 
 lamp should be replaced, and the normal life of a lamp is in the 
 
8 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 neighborhood of 800 hours. To obtain the most economical results, 
 such lamps should always be replaced at the end of their useful life. 
 
 In Table I are given values of efficiency and life of a 3.5-watt, 
 110-volt carbon lamp for various voltages impressed on the lamp. 
 These values are plotted in Fig. 5. The curves show that a 3% 
 increase of voltage on the lamp reduces the life by one-half, while an 
 increase of 6% causes the useful life to fall to one-third its normal 
 value. The effect is even greater w r hen 3.1-watt lamps are used, but 
 not so great with 4-watt lamps. From this we see that the regulation 
 of the voltage used on the system must be very good if high efficiency 
 lamps are to be used, and this regulation will determine the efficiency 
 of the lamp to be installed. 
 
 Selection of Lamps. Ordinary Carbon Type. Lamps taking 3.1 
 watts per candle-power will give satisfaction only when the regulation 
 of voltage is the best practically a constant voltage maintained at the 
 
 normal voltage of the lamp. 
 
 TABLE I 
 
 Effects of Change in Voltage 
 
 Standard 3. 5- Watt Lamp 
 
 V OT/TAGE 
 
 PER CENT. OF 
 NORMAL 
 
 CANDLE-POWER 
 PER CENT. OF 
 NORMAL 
 
 WATTS PER 
 CANDLE-POWER 
 
 LIFE PER CENT. 
 OF NORMAL 
 
 DETERIORATION 
 PER CENT. OF 
 NORMAL 
 
 90 
 
 53 
 
 5.36 
 
 
 
 91 
 
 56 
 
 5.09 
 
 
 
 92 
 
 61 
 
 4.85 
 
 
 
 93 
 
 65 
 
 4.63 
 
 
 
 94 
 
 69 
 
 4.44 
 
 394 
 
 25 
 
 95 
 
 73 
 
 4.26 
 
 310 
 
 32 
 
 96 
 
 78 
 
 4.09 
 
 247 
 
 44 
 
 97 
 
 83 
 
 3.93 
 
 195 
 
 51 
 
 98 
 
 88 
 
 3.78 
 
 153 
 
 65 
 
 99 
 
 94 
 
 3.64 
 
 126 
 
 79 
 
 100 
 
 100 
 
 3.5 
 
 100 
 
 100 
 
 101 
 
 106 
 
 3.38 
 
 84 
 
 118 
 
 102 
 
 111 
 
 3.27 
 
 68 
 
 146 
 
 103 
 
 116 
 
 3.16 
 
 58 
 
 173 
 
 104 
 
 123 
 
 3.05 
 
 47 
 
 211 
 
 105 
 
 129 
 
 2.95 
 
 39 
 
 253 
 
 106 
 
 137 
 
 2.85 
 
 31 
 
 316 
 
 107 
 
 143 
 
 2.76 
 
 26 
 
 380 
 
 108 
 
 152 
 
 2.68 
 
 21 
 
 474 
 
 109 
 
 159 
 
 2.60 
 
 17 
 
 575 
 
 110 
 
 167 
 
 2.53 
 
 16 
 
 637 
 
 Lamps of 3.5 watts per candle-power should be used when the 
 regulation is fair, say with a maximum variation of 2% from the 
 normal voltage. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 90 
 
 92 94 93 98 100 102 104 103 108 
 
 Fig. 5. Curves of Efficiency and Life of Carbon Filament Lamps. 
 
 110 
 
 Lamps of 4 watts per candle-power should be installed when the 
 regulation is poor. These values are for 110-volt lamps. A 220- volt 
 lamp should have a lower efficiency to give a long life. This is on 
 
 100 200 300 400 500 00 
 
 HOURS 
 Fig. 6. Life Curves of Incandescent Lamps. 
 
 account of the fact that, for the same candle-power, the 220-volt lamp 
 must be constructed with a filament which is long and slender com- 
 pared to that of the 110-volt lamp, and if such a filament is run at a 
 high temperature its life is short. The 220-volt lamp is used to some 
 considerable extent abroad but it is not employed extensively in the 
 United States. It is customary to operate such lamps at an efficiency 
 of about 4 watts per candle-power. 
 
10 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 Lamps should always be renewed at the end of their useful life, 
 this point being termed the smashing-point, as it is cheaper to replace 
 the lamp than to run it at the reduced candle-power. Some recom- 
 mend running these lamps at a higher voltage, but that means at a 
 reduced life, and it is not good practice to do this. 
 
 Fig. 7. Horizontal Distribution Curve for Single-Loop Filament. 
 
 Fig. 6 shows the life curves of a series of incandescent lamps. 
 These curves show that there is an increase in the candle-power of 
 some of the lamps during the first 100 hours, followed by a period 
 during which the value is fairly constant, after which the light given 
 by the lamp is gradually reduced to about 80% of the initial candle- 
 power. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 11 
 
 Distribution of Light. In Fig. 1 are shown various forms of 
 filaments used in incandescent lamps, and Figs. 7 and 8 show the dis- 
 tribution of light from a single-loop filament of cylindrical cross- 
 section. Fig. 7 shows the distribution of light in a horizontal plane, the 
 lamp being mounted in a vertical position, and Fig. 8 shows the dis- 
 
 o 
 
 Fig. 8. Vertical Distribution Curve for Single-Loop Filament. 
 
 tribution in a vertical plane. By changing the shape of the filament., 
 the light distribution is varied. A mean of the readings taken in 
 the horizontal plane forms the mean horizontal candle-power, and 
 this candle-power rating is the one generally assumed for the ordinary 
 incandescent lamp. A mean of the readings taken in a vertical plane 
 gives us the mean vertical candle-power, but this value is of little use. 
 
12 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 Mean Spherical Candle=Power. When comparing lamps which 
 give an entirely different light distribution, the mean horizontal 
 candle-power does not form a proper basis for such comparison, and 
 the mean spherical or the mean hemispherical candle-power is used 
 instead. By mean spherical candle-power is meant a mean value of 
 the light taken in all directions. The methods for determining this 
 will be taken up under photometry. The mean hemispherical candle- 
 power has reference, usually, to the light given out below the horizon- 
 tal plane. 
 
 The Gem Metallized Filament Lamp. When the incandescent 
 lamp was first well established commercially, the useful life of a unit, 
 when operated at 3.1 watts per candle, was about 200 hours. The 
 improvements in the process of manufacture have been continuous 
 from that time until now, and the useful life of a lamp operated at 
 that efficiency to-day is in the neighborhood of 500 hours. Experi- 
 ments in the treatment of the carbon filament have led to the intro- 
 duction of the gem metallized filament lamp. This lamp should not 
 be confused with the metallic filament lamps, to be described later, 
 because the material used is carbon, not a metal. As a result of 
 special treatment the carbon filament assumes many of the character- 
 istics of a metallic conductor, hence the term metallized filament. 
 The word graphitized has been proposed in place of metallized. 
 
 TABLE II 
 * Data on the Gem Metallized Filament Lamp 
 
 WATTS 
 
 HORIZONTAL 
 C. P. 
 
 WATTS PER 
 CANDLE 
 
 tSPHERICAL 
 
 REDUCTION 
 FACTOR 
 
 $ USEFUL 
 LIFE 
 
 10 
 
 16 
 
 2.5 
 
 .816 
 
 450 hrs. 
 
 50 
 
 20 
 
 2.5 
 
 .825 
 
 450 
 
 80 
 
 32 
 
 2.5 
 
 .816 
 
 450 
 
 100 
 
 40 
 
 2.5 
 
 ; 
 
 460 
 
 125 
 
 50 
 
 2.5 
 
 ;; 
 
 450 
 
 187.5 
 
 75 
 
 2.5 
 
 ;; 
 
 450 
 
 250 
 
 100 
 
 2.5 
 
 % 
 
 450 
 
 * These lamps are normally rated at three voltages, 114, 112, and 110 volts, but 
 data referring to the highest voltage only are given. 
 
 t By spherical reduction factor is meant the factor by which the horizontal candle- 
 power must be multiplied to obtain the mean spherical candle-power. 
 
 J The larger units are almost invariably used with reflectors, hence no spherical 
 reduction factor is given. 
 
 $ The life of the lamps when operated at the lower voltage is increased to about 
 950 hours, and the efficiency is changed to 2.83 watts per candle. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 13 
 
 When a filament, as treated in the ordinary manner, is run at a 
 high temperature in a lamp there is no improvement of the filament, 
 but it was discovered that, if the treated filaments were subjected to 
 the extremely high temperature of the electric resistance furnace 
 3,000 to 3,700 degrees C. at atmospheric pressure, the physical 
 nature of the carbon was changed and the resulting filament could be 
 operated at a higher temperature in the lamp and a higher efficiency, 
 
 /J* 
 
 30' 
 
 IS' 30 
 
 Fig. 9. Typical Distribution Curves of Gem Lamp with Different Types of Reflectors. 
 
 and still maintain a life comparable to that of a 3.1-watt lamp. This 
 special heating of the filament, which is applied to the base filament 
 before it is flashed, as well as to the treated filament, causes the cold 
 resistance of the carbon to be very materially decreased and the fila- 
 ment, as used in the lamp, has a positive temperature coefficient 
 rise in resistance with rise in temperature a desirable feature from 
 the standpoint of voltage regulation of the circuit from which the 
 lamps are operated. The high temperature also results in the driving 
 off of considerable of the material which, in the ordinary lamp, causes 
 the globe to blacken after the lamp has been in use for some time. 
 The blackening of the bulb is responsible to a considerable degree 
 
14 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 for the decrease in candle-power of the incandescent lamp. The 
 metallized filament lamp is operated at an efficiency of 2.5 watts pel 
 candle with a useful life of about 500 hours. The change in candle- 
 power with change in voltage is less than in the ordinary lamp on 
 account of the positive temperature coefficient of the filament. These 
 lamps are not manufactured for very low candle-powers, owing to the 
 
 difficulty of treating very slender fila- 
 ments, but they are made in sizes con- 
 suming from 40 to 250 watts. Table II 
 gives some useful information in connec- 
 tion with metallized filament lamps. The 
 filaments are made in a variety of shapes 
 and the distribution curves are usually 
 modified in practice by the use of shades 
 and reflectors. The general appearance 
 of the lamp does not differ from that of 
 the ordinary carbon lamp. Fig. 9 shows 
 typical distribution curves of the metallized 
 filament lamp as it is installed in practice. 
 Metallic Filament Lamps. The Tan- 
 talum Lamp. The first of the metallic 
 filament lamps to be introduced to any considerable extent com- 
 mercially was the tantalum lamp. Dr. Bolton of the Siemens & 
 Halske Company first discovered the methods of obtaining the pure 
 metal tantalum. This metal is rendered ductile and drawn into 
 slender filaments for incandes- 
 cent lamps. Tantalum has a high 
 tensile strength and high melting 
 point, and tantalum filaments are 
 operated at temperatures much 
 higher than those used with the 
 carbon filament lamp. On ac- 
 count Of the comparatively low Fig - n - Tantalum Filament Before and 
 
 J After 1,000 Hours' Use. 
 
 specific resistance of this material 
 
 the filaments, for 110-volt lamps must 'be long and slender, and 
 this necessitates a special form of support. Figs. 10, 11, and 12 
 show some interesting views of the tantalum lamp and the fila- 
 ment. This lamp is operated at the efficiency of 2 watts per 
 
 10. 
 
 Hound Bulb Tantalum 
 Lamp. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 15 
 
 candle-power, with a life comparable to that of the ordinary lamp. 
 By special treatment it is possible to increase the resistance of the 
 filaments so that they may be shorter and heavier than those used in 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
 Appearance of Filament After Filament Frame Showing 
 
 Having Been Used. Broken Filament. 
 
 the first of the tantalum lamps. It should be noted that the life of 
 this type of lamp on alternating-current circuits is somewhat uncer- 
 tain; it is much more satisfactory for operation on direct-current 
 circuits. Tables III and IV give some general data on the tantalum 
 lamp, and Figs. 13 and 14 show typical distribution curves for the 
 units as installed at present. 
 
 TABLE III 
 Data on Tantalum Lamp 
 
 GENERAL ELECTRIC CO., MFTRS. 
 
 SIZE OF BULB 
 
 
 ESTIMATED LIFE 
 
 
 DIAMETER OF 
 
 
 
 
 BULB IN INCHES 
 
 
 
 REGULAR 
 
 ROUND 
 
 
 ON A. C. 
 
 ON D. C. 
 
 40 watt 
 
 
 2i 5 6 
 
 350 
 
 800 
 
 50 " 
 
 
 2& 
 
 350 
 
 800 
 
 80 " 
 
 
 3i 
 
 400 
 
 800 
 
 
 40 watt 
 
 31 
 
 350 
 
 800 
 
 
 80 " 
 
 o 
 
 400 
 
 800 
 
16 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 TABLE IV 
 Data on the Life of a 25-C. P. Unit 
 
 No. OF HOURS BURNED 
 
 CANDLE-POWER 
 
 WATTS PER CANDLE 
 
 
 
 19.8 
 
 2.17 
 
 25 
 
 23.6 
 
 1.865 
 
 50 
 
 23.1 
 
 1.90 
 
 125 
 
 22.3 
 
 1.98 
 
 225 
 
 22.4 
 
 1.96 
 
 350 
 
 22.3 
 
 1.97 
 
 450 
 
 22.2 
 
 1.98 
 
 550 
 
 21.2 
 
 2.05 
 
 650 
 
 19.6 
 
 2.20 
 
 Fig. 13. Vertical Distribution Curve Without Reflector. 
 
 The Tungsten Lamp. Following closely upon the development 
 of the tantalum lamp came the tungsten lamp. Tungsten possesses 
 a very high melting point and an indirect method is employed in 
 farming filaments for incandescent lamps. There are several of these 
 methods in use. In one method a fine carbon filament is flashed in 
 an atmosphere of tungsten oxy chloride mixed with just the proper 
 proportion of hydrogen, in which case the filament gradually changes 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 17 
 
 to one of tungsten. A second method consists of the use of powdered 
 tungsten and some binding material, sometimes organic and in other 
 cases metallic. The powdered tungsten is mixed with the binding 
 material, the paste squirted into filaments, and the. binding material is 
 then expelled, usually by the aid of heat. Another method of manu- 
 facture consists of securing tungsten in colloidal form, squirting it 
 
 Fig. 14. Distribution Curves for Tantalum Lamp. No. 1, 40 Watts; No. 2, 80 Watts. 
 
 into filaments, and then changing them to the metallic form by passing 
 electric current through the filaments. 
 
 The tungsten lamp has the highest efficiency of any of the com- 
 mercial forms of metallic filament lamps now in use, about 1.25 watts 
 per candle-power when operated so as to give a normal life, and lamps 
 for 110-volt service and consuming but 40 watts have recently been 
 put on the market. A 25-watt lamp for this same voltage appears to 
 be a possibility. The units introduced at first were of high candle- 
 power because of the difficulty of manufacturing the slender filaments 
 required for the low candle-power lamps. 
 
18 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 The advantages of these metals, tantalum and tungsten, for 
 incandescent lamps are in the improved efficiency of the lamps and 
 the good quality of the light, white or nearly white in both cases. 
 In either case the change in candle-power with change in voltage is 
 less than the corresponding change in an ordinary carbon lamp. The 
 disadvantage lies in the fact that the filaments must be made long and 
 slender, and hence are fragile, for low candle-power units to be used 
 
 Fig. 15. Multiple Tungsten Lamp. 
 
 Fig. 1 6. Series Tungsten Lamp. 
 
 on commercial voltages. In some cases tungsten lamps are con- 
 structed for lower voltages and are used on commercial circuits through 
 the agency of small step-down transformers. Improvements in the 
 process of manufacture of filaments and of the method of their sup- 
 port have resulted in the construction of 110-volt lamps for candle- 
 powers lower than was once thought possible. Figs. 15 and 16 show 
 the appearance of the tungsten lamp, and Figs. 17 and 18 give some 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 19 
 
 typical distribution curves. Tables V and VI give data on this lamp 
 as it is manufactured at present. One very considerable application 
 
 20* Jo 
 
 Fig. 17. C. P. Distribution Curves of 100- Watt Gen. Elec. Tungsten 
 Incandescent Units with B-3, C-3, and D-3 Holophanes. 
 
 of the tungsten lamp is to incandescent street lighting on series cir- 
 cuits, in which case the lamp may be made for a low voltage across 
 its terminals and the filament may be made comparatively short and 
 
 w'o 
 
 60 
 
 60* 
 
 50 40 3O 20 /O" O" W 20 3O 4O' 50" 
 
 Fig. 18. Candle-Power Distribution Given with 40 c. p Gen. Elec. Tungsten 
 Series Lamp and Radial Wave Reflector. 
 
 heavy. The tungsten lamp is also being introduced as a low voltage 
 battery lamp. 
 
 The Just lamp, the Z lamp, the Osram lamp, the Zircon- Wolfram 
 lamp, the Osmin lamp, etc., are all tungsten lamps, the filaments 
 being prepared by some of the general methods already described or 
 modifications of them. 
 
20 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 TABLE V 
 Tungsten Lamps 
 
 MULTIPLE 
 
 WATTS 
 
 VOLTS 
 
 CANDLE- 
 POWER 
 
 WATTS 
 
 PER 
 
 C. P. 
 
 TIP CANDLE- 
 POWER 
 
 SPHERICAL 
 REDUCTION 
 FACTOR 
 
 40 
 
 100 
 
 32 
 
 1.25 
 
 5 
 
 76.3 
 
 60 
 
 125 
 
 40 
 
 1.25 
 
 5.6 
 
 76.3 
 
 TABLE VI 
 Tungsten Lamps 
 
 SERIES 
 
 AMPERES 
 
 VOLTS 
 
 CANDLE-POWER 
 
 WATTS PER C. P. 
 
 4 
 
 13.5 
 
 40 
 
 1.35 
 
 
 20.25 
 
 60 
 
 
 5.5 
 
 9.8 
 
 40 
 
 1.35 
 
 
 14.7 
 
 60 
 
 
 6.6 
 
 8.2 
 
 40 
 
 1.35 
 
 
 12.3 
 
 60 
 
 
 7.5 
 
 7.2 
 
 40 
 
 1.35 
 
 
 10.8 
 
 60 
 
 
 The Osmium Lamp. Very efficient incandescent lamps have 
 been constructed using osmium for the filament. An indirect method 
 is resorted to in the formation of these filaments. Osmium lamps 
 have not been successful for commercial voltages because the fila- 
 ment is too fragile if it is made to have a high resistance, so these 
 lamps must be operated in series or through the agency of reducing 
 transformers if they are to be applied to 110-volt circuits. At 25 
 volts, lamps are constructed giving an efficiency of about 1.5 watts per 
 candle-power with a life comparable to that of a 3.5-watt carbon lamp. 
 Owing to the introduction of the tungsten lamp, the osmium lamp 
 will probably never be used to any great extent. 
 
 Other Metallic Filament Lamps. Table VII gives the melting 
 points of several metals which are highly refractory and those already 
 mentioned are not the only ones which have been successfully used 
 in incandescent lamps. Titanium, zirconium, iridium, etc., have 
 been successfully employed, but the tantalum and tungsten lamps are 
 the only ones which are used to any extent in the United States. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 21 
 
 TABLE VII 
 Melting Point of Some Metals 
 
 METAL 
 
 APPROXIMATE MELTING POINT 
 IN DEGREES C. 
 
 Tungsten 
 
 3080-3200 
 
 Titanium 
 
 3000 
 
 Tantalum 
 
 2900 
 
 Osmium 
 
 2500 
 
 Platinum 
 
 1775 
 
 Zirconium 
 
 1500 
 
 Silicon 
 
 1200 
 
 Carbon (not a metal) 
 
 3000 
 
 The Helion Lamp. The helion lamp, which gives considerable 
 promise of commercial development, is a compromise between the 
 carbon lamp and the metallic filament lamp. A slender filament of 
 carbon is flashed in a compound of silicon (gaseous state) and a fila- 
 ment composed of a carbon core more or 
 less impregnated with silicon and coated 
 with a metallic layer is formed. The 
 emissivity of such a filament is high, the 
 light is white in color, and the filament is 
 strong. The efficiency of the helion fila- 
 ment as far as it has been developed is 
 higher than that of a carbon filament 
 when operated at the same temperature. 
 At 1,500 degrees C. the efficiency of the 
 helion filament is 2.15 watts per candle- 
 power, while for a carbon filament it is 
 about 3.5 watts per candle-power. Fila- 
 ments of this type have been made which 
 may be heated to incandescence in open 
 air without immediate destruction. This 
 lamp is not yet on the market. 
 
 The Nernst Lamp. The Nernst lamp 
 is still another form of incandescent 
 
 lamp, several types of which are shown in Figs. 19, 20, 21, and 22. 
 This lamp uses for the incandescent material certain oxides of the 
 rare earths, the oxides being mixed in the form of a paste, then 
 squirted through a die into a string which is subjected to a roast- 
 
 Fig. 19. Westinghouse Nernst 
 Multiple-Glower Lamp. 
 
22 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 ing process forming the filament or glower material of the lamp as 
 represented by the lower white line in Fig. 23. The more recent 
 glowers are made hollow instead of solid. The glowers are cut to 
 
 the desired length and platinum ter- 
 minals attached. The attachment 
 of these terminals to the glowers is 
 an important process in the manu- 
 facture of the lamp. The recent 
 discovery of additional oxides has 
 led to the construction of glowers 
 which show a considerable gain in 
 efficiency over those previously used. 
 The glowers are heated to incan- 
 descence in open air, a vacuum not 
 being required. 
 
 As the glower is a non-conductor 
 when cold, some form of heater is 
 t necessary to bring it up to a tem- 
 ./ p^wMA \\ perature at which it will conduct. 
 
 X r j\t/( r ^ wo f rms f neater nave been 
 
 M^, =S3Jy& used. One of them consists of a 
 
 porcelain tube shown just above 
 the glower, Fig. 23, about which a 
 fine platinum wire is wound; the 
 wire is in turn coated with a cement. 
 Two or more of these tubes are 
 mounted directly over the glower, or 
 glowers, and serve as a reflector 
 as well as a heater. The second 
 form of heater consists of a slender 
 rig. 20. sectional view of Multiple- rod of refractory material about 
 
 Glower Westinghouse Nernst Lamp. wm ' c h a platinum wire is WOUnd, 
 
 the wire again being covered with 
 
 a cement. This rod is then formed into a spiral which surrounds the 
 glower in the vertical glower type, or is formed into the wafer heater, 
 Fig. 24, now universally employed in the Westinghouse Nernst lamp 
 with horizontal glowers. The wafer heater is bent so that it can be 
 mounted with several sections parallel to the glower or glowers. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 23 
 
 The heating device is connected across the circuit when the lamp 
 is first turned on, and it must be cut out of circuit after the glowers 
 become conductors in order to save the energy consumed by the 
 
 Fig. 21. Sectional Views of Single-Glower Westinghouse Nernst Lamp. 
 
 heater and to prolong the life of the heater. The automatic cut-out 
 is operated by means of an electromagnet so arranged that current 
 flows through this magnet as soon as the glower becomes a conductor, 
 and contacts in the heater circuit 
 are opened by this magnet. The 
 contacts in the heater circuit are 
 kept normally closed, usually by the 
 force of gravity. 
 
 The conductivity of the glower 
 increases with the increase of tem- 
 perature the material has a nega- 
 tive temperature coefficient hence 
 if it were used on a constant poten- 
 tial circuit directly, the current 
 and temperature would continue 
 to rise until the glower was de- 
 
 Fig. 22. Westinghouse Nernst Screw 
 
 stroyed. To prevent the current Burner. 
 
24 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 from increasing beyond the desired value, a ballast resistance is 
 used in series with the glower. As is well known, the resistance of 
 iron wire increases quite rapidly with increase in temperature, and 
 
 the resistance of a fine pure iron wire 
 is so adjusted that the resistance of the 
 combined circuit of the glower and the 
 ballast becomes constant at the desired 
 temperature of the glower. The iron 
 wire must be protected from the air 
 to prevent oxidization and too rapid 
 temperature changes, and, for this 
 reason, it is mounted in a glass bulb 
 filled with hydrogen. Hydrogen has 
 been selected for this purpose because 
 
 Fig 23. Westinghouse Nernst Screw it is an inert gas and conducts the heat 
 
 Bur Z,;S 0"^' frm the ballast to the walls of the 
 
 Tubular Heater. bulb better than other gases which 
 
 might be used. 
 
 All of the parts enumerated, namely, glower, heater, cut-out, and 
 ballast, are mounted in a suitable manner; the smaller lamps have but 
 one glower and are arranged to fit in an incandescent lamp socket, 
 while the larger types are constructed at present with four glowers 
 
 Fig. 24. Wafer Heater and Mounting. 
 
 and are arranged to be supported in special fixtures, or the same as 
 small arc lamps. All parts are mechanically arranged so that renew- 
 als may be easily made when necessary and it is not possible to insert 
 a part belonging to one type of lamp into a lamp of a different type. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 25 
 
 The advantages claimed for the Nernst Jamp are : High effi- 
 ciency; a good color of light; a good distribution of light without the 
 use of reflectors: a long life with low cost of maintenance; and a 
 complete series of sizes of units, 
 thus allowing its adaption to prac- 
 tically all classes of illumination. If | 
 
 The lamp is constructed for 
 both direct- and alternating-current 
 service and for 110 and 220 volts. 
 When the alternating-current lamp 
 is used on a 110- volt circuit a small 
 transformer, commonly called a 
 converter coil, Fig. 25, is utilized to 
 raise the voltage at the lamp ter- 
 minals to about 220 volts. 
 
 Data on the Nernst lamp in its present form are given in Table 
 VIII, and Figs. 26 and 27 show the form of distribution curves. 
 
 TABLE VIII 
 General Data on the Nernst Lamp 
 
 Fig. 25. Converter Coil. 
 
 LAMP 
 
 RATING 
 IN WATTS 
 
 VOLTAGE 
 
 CURRENT 
 
 IN 
 
 AMPERES 
 
 MAX. 
 
 CANDLE- 
 POWER 
 
 MEAN 
 HEMISPHER- 
 ICAL C. P. 
 
 WATTS PER M. II. S. c. P. 
 FROM TEST 
 
 66 
 
 110 
 
 .6 
 
 74 
 
 50 
 
 1.38 
 
 
 88 
 
 220 
 
 .4 
 
 105 
 
 77 
 
 1.2 
 
 A.C. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-Glower or 
 
 110 
 
 110 
 
 1.0 
 
 131 
 
 96.4 
 
 1.2 
 
 D.C. 
 
 
 220 
 
 .5 
 
 
 
 
 
 132 
 
 110 
 
 1.2 
 
 156 
 
 114 
 
 1.2 
 
 
 
 220 
 
 .6 
 
 
 
 
 
 264 
 
 220 
 
 1.2 
 
 345 
 
 231 
 
 1 .2 [2-Glower-i . -, 
 
 396 
 
 220 
 
 1.8 
 
 528 
 
 359 
 
 1.15 J3-Glower [ or 
 
 528 
 
 220 
 
 2.4 
 
 745 
 
 504 
 
 1.09 }4-Glower j D - C * 
 
 Comparison of the Different Types of Incandescent Lamps. A 
 
 direct comparison of the different types of incandescent lamps can- 
 not be made but it is desirable at this time to note the following points : 
 The lamps which are considered commercial in the United States 
 at the present time are the carbon, gem, tantalum, tungsten, and 
 Nernst lamp. The efficiencies ordinarily accepted run in the order 
 
26 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 given, approximately 3.1, 2.5, 2, 1.25, and 1.2 watts per candle respec- 
 tively. The figure of 1.2 watts per candle for the Nernst lamp is 
 based upon the mean hemispherical candle-pov/er and it should not 
 be compared directly with the other efficiencies. The color of the 
 light in all of the above cases is suitable for the majority of classes of 
 illumination, the light from the higher efficiency units being some- 
 what whiter than that from the carbon lamp. All of these lamps are 
 constructed for commercial voltages and for either direct or alternating 
 current. The use of the tantalum lamp on alternating current is not 
 
 60' 
 
 75' 
 
 SO' 75" 60' 
 
 Fig. 26. Distribution Curve of 132- Watt Type Westinghouse Nernst Lamp. 
 Single Glower. 
 
 always to be recommended as the service is unsatisfactory in some 
 cases. The minimum size of units for 110 volts is about 4 candle- 
 power for the carbon lamp, 20 candle-power for the metallic filament 
 lamp, and 50 candle-power (mean hemispherical) for the Nernst 
 lamp. Some of the metallic filament lamps are constructed for a 
 consumption of as high as 250 watts, while the largest size of the 
 Nernst lamp uses 528 watts. The light distribution of any of the 
 units is subject to considerable variation through the agency of re- 
 flectors, but the Nernst lamp is ordinarily installed without a reflec- 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 27 
 
 tor. Practically all of the other units of high candle-power use re- 
 flectors and only a few of the typical curves of light distribution curves 
 with reflectors have been shown in connection with the description 
 of the lamps. The life of all of the commercial lamps described is 
 considered as satisfactory. The minimum life is seldom less than 
 500 hours and the useful life is generally between 500 and 1,000 hours. 
 On account of the slender filaments employed in the metallic filament 
 
 45- 
 
 60 75" 90 75" 60 
 
 Fig. 27. Distribution of Light from Multiple-Glower "Westinghouse Nernst Lamps with 
 
 8" Clear Globes. No. 1, 2 Glower; No. 2, 3 Glower; No. 3, 4 Glower. 
 
 lamps they are not made for low candle-powers at commercial vol- 
 tages. The introduction of transformers for the purpose of changing 
 the circuit voltage to one suitable for low candle-power units has not 
 become at all general as yet in this country. 
 
 SPECIAL LAMPS 
 
 The Mercury Vapor Lamp. The mercury vapor lamp in this 
 country is put on the market by the Cooper-Hewitt Electric Company 
 and it is being used to a considerable extent for industrial illumination. 
 In this lamp mercury vapor, rendered incandescent by the passage 
 of an electric current through it, is the source of light. In its standard 
 form this lamp consists of a long glass tube from which the air has 
 been carefully exhausted, and which contains a small amount of 
 metallic mercury. The mercury is held in a large bulb at one end of 
 
28 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 the tube and forms the negative electrode in the direct-current lamp. 
 The other electrode is formed by an iron cup and the connections 
 between the lamp terminals and the electrodes are of platinum where 
 this connection passes through the glass. Fig. 28 gives the general 
 appearance of a standard lamp having the following specifications: 
 Total watts (110 volts, 3.5 amperes) = 385 
 Candle-power (M. H. with reflector) = 700 
 Watts per candle = 0.55 
 Length of tube, total = 55 in. 
 Length of light-giving section = 45 in. 
 Diameter of tube = 1 in. 
 
 Height from lowest point of lamp to ceiling plate = 22 in. 
 For 220-volt service two lamps are connected in series. 
 The mercury vapor, at the start, may be formed in two ways: 
 First, the lamp may be tipped so that a stream of mercury makes 
 
 contact between the two elec- 
 trodes and mercury is vaporized 
 when the stream breaks. Second, 
 by means of a high inductance 
 and a quick break switch, a very 
 high voltage sufficient to pass a 
 current from one electrode to the 
 
 Fig. 28. Cooper-Hewitt Mercury Vapor ,1 ,1 1,1 
 
 Lamp other through the vacuum, is in- 
 
 duced and the conducting vapor 
 
 is formed. The tilting method of starting is preferred and this 
 tilting is brought about automatically in the more recent types of 
 lamp Fig. 29 shows the connections for automatically starting two 
 lamps in series. A steadying resistance and reactance are connected 
 as shown in this figure. 
 
 The mercury vapor lamp is constructed in rather large units, 
 the 55-volt, 3.5-ampere lamp being the smallest standard size. The 
 color of the light emitted is objectionable for some purposes as there 
 is an entire absence of red rays and the light is practically monochro- 
 matic. The illumination from this type of lamp is excellent where 
 sharp contrast or minute detail is to be brought out, and this fact 
 has led to its introduction for such classes of lighting as silk mills and 
 cotton mills. On account of its color the application of this lamp is 
 limited to the lighting of shops, offices, and drafting rooms, or to disc 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 29 
 
 play windows where the goods shown will not be changed in appear- 
 ance by the color of the light. It is used to a considerable extent in 
 photographic work on account of the actinic properties of the light. 
 Special reactances must be provided for a mercury arc lamp operating 
 on single-phase, alternating-current circuits. 
 
 The Moore Tube Light. The Moore light makes use of the 
 familiar Geissler tube discharge discharge of electricity through a 
 vacuum tube as a source of illumination. The practical application 
 of this discharge to a system of lighting has involved a large amount 
 
 t03-I2O volts 
 
 3.5 Ampere 
 
 Switch 
 
 H Inductance 
 
 \ 
 j 
 
 I|LKJ | induct once 
 1 Coil 
 
 ==#^J 
 Fig. 29. Wiring Diagram. Two H Automatic Lamps in Series. 
 
 of consistent research on the part of the inventor and it has now been 
 brought to such a stage that several installations have been made. 
 The system has many interesting features. 
 
 In the normal method of installation, a glass tube If inches in 
 diameter is made up by connecting standard lengths of glass tubing 
 together until the total desired length is reached, and this continuous 
 tube, which forms the source of light when in operation, is mounted 
 in the desired position with respect to the plane of illumination. In 
 many cases the tube forms a large rectangle mounted just beneath 
 the ceiling of the room to be lighted. The tube may be of any reason- 
 able length, actual values running from 40 to 220 feet. In order to 
 
30 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 Tube distributed, in 
 cmy form des~ire<4 to 
 ofsoofeet. 
 
 provide an electrical discharge through this tube it is customary to 
 lead both ends of the tube to the high tension terminals of a trans- 
 former, the low tension side of which may be connected to the alter- 
 nating-current lighting mains. This transformer is constructed so 
 that the high tension terminals are not exposed and the current is 
 led into the tube by means of platinum wires attached to carbon 
 electrodes. The electrodes are about eight inches in length. The 
 ends of the tube and the high tension terminals are enclosed in a steel 
 casing so as to effectually prevent anything from coming in contact 
 with the high potential of the system. As stated, the low tension side 
 
 of the trans- 
 former is con- 
 nected to the 
 usual 60-cycle 
 lighting mains. 
 If direct current 
 is used for distribution, a motor- 
 generator set for furnishing alter- 
 nating current to the primary of 
 the transformer is required. Any 
 frequency from 60 cycles up is 
 suitable for the operation of these 
 tubes. At lower frequencies there 
 is some appreciable variation of 
 the light emitted. One other de- 
 vice is necessary for the suitable 
 operation of this form of light and 
 this is known as the regulator. In order to maintain a constant pres- 
 sure inside the tube, and such a constant pressure is necessary for 
 its satisfactory operation, there must be some automatic device which 
 will allow a small amount of gas to enter the tube at intervals while 
 it is in operation. The regulator accomplishes this purpose. Fig. 
 30 shows a diagram of the very simple connections of the system and 
 gives the relative positions occupied by the transformer, tube, and regu- 
 lator. Fig. 31 gives an enlarged view of the regulator, a description 
 of which and its method of operation is given as follows: 
 
 A piece of -inch glass tubing is supported vertically and its bottom end 
 is contracted into a f -inch glass tube which extends to the main lighting tube. 
 
 Fig. 30. Diagram Showing Essentia 
 Features of the Moore Light. 1 . Light- 
 ing Tube; 2. Transformer Case; 
 3. Lamp Terminals; 4. Trans- 
 former; 5, 6, 7, 8, Regulators. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 31 
 
 At the point of contraction at the bottom of the f-inch tube there is sealed 
 by means of cement a | inch carbon plug, the porosity of which is not great 
 enough to allow mercury to percolate through it but which will permit gases 
 easily to pass, due- to the high vacuum of the 
 lighting tube connected to the lower end of the 
 plug, and approximately atmospheric pressure 
 above it. This carbon plug is normally com- 
 pletely covered with what would correspond to 
 a thimbleful of mercury which simply seals the 
 pores of the carbon plug, and therefore has 
 nothing whatever to do with the conducting 
 properties of the gas in the main tube which 
 produces the light. Partly immersed in the 
 mercury and concentric with the carbon plug, 
 is another smaller and movable glass tube, the 
 upper end of which is filled with soft iron wire, 
 which acts as the core of a small solenoid con- 
 nected in series with the transformer. The 
 action of the solenoid is to lift the concentric 
 glass tube partly out of the mercury, the sur- 
 face of which falls and thereby causes the 
 minute tip of the conical shaped carbon plug 
 to be slightly exposed for a second or two. 
 
 This exposure is sufficient to allow 
 a small amount of gas to enter the tube, 
 the current decreases slightly, and the 
 carbon plug is again sealed. The process 
 above described takes place at intervals 
 of about one minute when the tube is in 
 operation. 
 
 The color of the light emitted by the 
 tube depends upon the gas used in it. 
 The regulator is fitted with some chem- 
 ical arrangement whereby the proper gas 
 is admitted to it when the tube is in opera- 
 tion. Nitrogen is employed when the tube 
 gives the highest efficiency and the light 
 emitted when this gas is used is yellowish 
 in color. Air gives a pink appearance to 
 the tube and carbon dioxide is employed when a white light is desired. 
 
 Table IX gives general data on the Moore tube light. The 
 advantages claimed for this light are: High efficiency, good color, and 
 low intrinsic brilliancy. 
 
 Fig. 31. Regulating Valve. 
 
32 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 TABLE IX 
 Data on the Moore Tube Light 
 
 LENGTH OF 
 TUBE 
 
 TRANSFORMER 
 CAPACITY 
 
 POWER FACTOR 
 OF CIRCUIT 
 
 VOLTAGE AT LAMP TERMINALS 
 
 40-70 ft. 
 
 80-125 " 
 
 2 kw. 
 2.75 " 
 
 65-84% 
 
 3,146 for 40-ft. tube, at 
 12 Hefners per ft. 
 
 130-180 " 
 
 3.5 " 
 
 
 
 190-220 " 
 
 4.5 " 
 
 
 12,441 for 220-ft. tube, at 
 12 hefners per ft. 
 
 Pressure in tube, about ^ mm. of mercury. 
 
 Watts per hefner, 3.2 for 20-foot tube including transformer. 
 
 Watts per hefner, 1.4 for 180-foot tube including transfo.'mer. 
 
 Hefner per foot, normal, 12. 
 
 Note that one hefner equals 0.88 candle-power. 
 
 ARC LAMPS 
 
 The Electric Arc. Suppose two carbon rods are connected in 
 an electric circuit, and the circuit closed by touching the tips of these 
 rods together; on separating the carbons again the circuit will not 
 be broken, provided the space between the carbons be not too great, 
 
 but will be maintained through the arc 
 formed at these points. This phenom- 
 enon, which is the basis of the arc 
 light, was first observed on a large scale 
 by Sir Humphrey Davy, who used a 
 battery of 2,000 cells and produced an 
 arc between charcoal points four inches 
 apart. 
 
 As the incandescence of the carbons 
 across which an arc is maintained, to- 
 gether with the arc itself, forms the 
 source of light for a large portion of arc 
 lamps, it will be well to study the 
 nature of the arc. Fig. 32 shows the 
 general appearance of an arc between two carbon electrodes when 
 maintained by direct current. 
 
 Fig. 32. The Electric Arc between 
 Carbon Terminals. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 33 
 
 Here the current is assumed as passing from the top carbon to 
 the bottom one as indicated by the arrow and signs. We find, in the 
 direct-current arc, that the most of the light issues from the tip of the 
 positive carbon, or electrode, and this portion is known as the crater 
 of the arc. This crater has a temperature of from 3,000 to 3,500 C., 
 the temperature at which the carbon vaporizes, and gives fully 80 to 
 85% of the light furnished by the arc. The negative carbon becomes 
 pointed at the same time thai the positive one is hollowed out to form 
 the crater, and it is also incandescent but not to as great a degree as 
 the positive carbon. Between the electrodes there is a band of violet 
 light, the arc proper, and this 
 is surrounded by a luminous 
 zone of a golden yellow color. 
 The arc proper does not fur- 
 nish more than 5% of the light 
 emitted when pure carbon 
 electrodes are used. 
 
 The carbons are worn 
 away or consumed by the 
 passage of the current, the 
 positive carbon being con- 
 sumed about twice as rapidly 
 as the negative. 
 
 The light distribution 
 curve of a direct-current arc, 
 taken in a vertical plane, is 
 shown in Fig. 33. Here it is seen that the maximum amount of light 
 is given off at an angle of about 50 from the vertical, the negative 
 carbon shutting off the rays of light that are thrown directly down- 
 ward from the crater. 
 
 If alternating current is used, the upper carbon becomes positive 
 and negative alternately, and there is no chance for a crater to be 
 formed, both carbons giving off the same amount of light and being 
 consumed at about the same rate. The light distribution curve of 
 an alternating-current arc is shown in Fig. 34. 
 
 AroLamp Mechanisms. In a practical lamp we must have not 
 only a pair of carbons for producing the arc, but also means for sup- 
 porting these carbons, together with suitable arrangements for leading 
 
 Fig. 33. 
 
 Distribution Curve for D. C. Arc 
 Lamp (Vertical Plane). 
 
34 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 the current to them and for maintaining them at the proper distance 
 apart. The carbons are kept separated the proper distance by the 
 operating mechanisms which must perform the following functions: 
 
 1. The carbons must be in contact, or be brought into contact, to start 
 the arc when the current first flows. 
 
 2. They must be separated at the right distance to form a proper arc 
 immediately afterward. 
 
 Fig. 34. Distribution Curve for A. C. Arc Lamp (Vertical Plane). 
 
 3. The carbons must be fed to the arc as they are consumed. 
 
 4. The circuit should be open or closed when the carbons are entirely 
 consumed, depending on the method of power distribution. 
 
 The feeding of the carbons may be done by hand, as is the case 
 in some stereopticons using an arc, but for ordinary illumination the 
 striking and maintaining of the arc must be automatic. It is made 
 so in all cases by means of solenoids acting against the force of gravity 
 or against springs. There are an endless number of such mechanisms, 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 35 
 
 but a few only will be described here. They may be roughly divided 
 into three classes: 
 
 1. Shunt mechanisms. 
 
 2. Series mechanisms. 
 
 3. Differential mechanisms. 
 
 Shunt Mechanisms. In shunt lamps, the carbons are held apart 
 before the current is turned on, and the circuit is closed through a 
 solenoid connected in across the 
 gap so formed. All of the cur- 
 rent must pass through this coil 
 at first, and the plunger of the 
 solenoid is arranged to draw the 
 carbons together, thus starting 
 the arc. The pull of the solenoid 
 and that of tha springs are ad- 
 justed to maintain the arc at its 
 proper length. 
 
 Such lamps have the disad- 
 vantage of a high resistance at 
 the start 450 ohms or more 
 and are difficult to start on series 
 circuits, due to the high voltage 
 required. They tend to maintain 
 a constant voltage at the arc, but 
 do not aid the dynamo in its 
 regulation, so that the arcs are 
 liable to be a little unsteady. 
 
 Series Mechanisms. With 
 the series-lamp mechanism, the 
 carbons are together when the lamp is first started and the current, 
 flowing in the series coil, separates the electrodes, striking the arc. 
 When the arc is too long, the resistance is increased and the current 
 lowered so that the pull of the solenoid is weakened and the carbons 
 feed together. This type of lamp can be used only on constant- 
 potential systems. 
 
 Fig. 35 shows a diagram of the connection of such a lamp. This 
 diagram is illustrative of the connection of one of the lamps manu- 
 factured by the Western Electric Company, for use on a direct-current, 
 
 Fig. 35. Series Mechanism for D. C. 
 Arc Lamp. 
 
36 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 constant-potential system. The symbols + and refer to the termi- 
 nals of the lamp, and the lamp must be so connected that the current 
 flows from the top carbon to the bottom one. R is a series resistance, 
 adjustable for different voltages by means of the shunt G. F and D 
 are the controlling solenoids connected in series with the arc. B and 
 C are the positive and negative carbons respectively, while A is the 
 switch for turning the current on and off. H is the plunger of the 
 
 solenoids and I the carbon clutch, 
 ^ this being what is known as a 
 carbon-feed lamp. The carbons 
 are together when A is first closed, 
 the current is excessive, and the 
 plunger is drawn up into the so- 
 lenoids, lifting the carbon B until 
 the resistance of the arc lowers the 
 current to such a value that the 
 pull of the solenoid just counter- 
 balances the weight of the plunger 
 and carbon. G must be so adjusted 
 that this point is reached when the 
 arc is at its normal length. 
 
 Differential Mechanisms. In 
 the differential lamp, the series and 
 shunt mechanisms are combined, 
 the carbons being together at the 
 start, and the series coil arranged 
 so as to separate them while the 
 shunt coil is connected across the 
 arc, as before, to prevent the carbons from being drawn too far apart. 
 This lamp operates only over a low-current range, but it tends to aid 
 the generator in its regulation. 
 
 Fig. 36 shows a lamp having a differential control, this also being 
 the diagram of a Western Electric Company arc lamp for a direct- 
 current, constant-potential system. Here S represents the shunt coil 
 and M the series coil, the armature of the two magnets A and A' being 
 attached to a bell-crank, pivoted at B, and attached to the carbon 
 clutch C. The pull of coil S tends to lower the carbon while that of 
 M raises the carbon, and the two are so adjusted that equilibrium is 
 
 Fig. 36. 
 
 Differential Mechanism for 
 D. C. Arc Lamp. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 37 
 
 reached when the arc is of the proper length. All of the lamps are 
 fitted with an air dashpot, or some damping device, to prevent too 
 rapid movements of the working parts. 
 
 The methods of supporting the carbons and feeding them to 
 the arc may be divided into two classes: 
 
 1. Rod-feed mechanism. 
 
 2. Carbon-feed mechanism. 
 
 Rod-Feed Mechanism. 
 Lamps using a rod feed have 
 the upper carbons supported 
 by a conducting rod, and the 
 regulating mechanism acts on 
 this rod, the current being fed 
 to the rod by means of a sliding 
 contact. Fig. 37 shows the ar- 
 rangement of this type of feed. 
 The rod is shown at R, the 
 sliding contact at B, and the 
 carbon is attached to the rod 
 atC. 
 
 These lamps have the ad- 
 vantage that carbons, which 
 do not have a uniform cross- 
 section or smooth exterior, may 
 be used, but they possess the 
 disadvantage of being very 
 long in order to accommodate 
 the rod. The rod must also be 
 kept clean so as to make a 
 good contact with the brush. 
 
 Carbon-Feed Mechanism. In carbon-feed lamps the controlling 
 mechanism acts on the carbons directly through some form of clutch 
 such as is shown at C in Fig. 38. This clamp being lifted grips the 
 carbon, but allows the carbon to slip through it when the tension 
 is released. For this type of feed the carbon must be straight and 
 have a uniform cross-section as well as a smooth exterior. The 
 current may be led to the carbon by means of a flexible lead and a 
 short carbon holder 
 
 Fig. 37. Rod-Feed Mechanism. 
 
38 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 TYPES OF ARC LAMPS 
 
 Arc lamps are constructed to operate on direct-current or alter- 
 nating-current systems when connected in series or in multiple. They 
 are also made in both the open and the enclosed forms. 
 
 By an open arc is meant an arc lamp in which the arc is exposed 
 to the atmosphere, while in the enclosed arc an inner or enclosing 
 
 Fig. 38. Enclosed Arc Lamp with Carbon Feed Mechanism. 
 
 globe surrounds the arc, and this globe is covered with a cap which 
 renders it nearly air-tight. Fig. 38 is a good example of an enclosed 
 arc as manufactured by the General Electric Company. 
 
 Direct=Current Arcs. Open Types of Arcs for direct-current 
 systems were the first to be used to any great extent. When used 
 they are always connected in series, and are run from some form of 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 39 
 
 special arc machine, a description of which may be found in "Types 
 of Dynamo Electric Machinery." 
 
 Each lamp requires in the neighborhood of 50 volts for its opera- 
 tion, and, since the lamps are connected in series, the voltage of the 
 system will depend on the number of lamps; therefore, the number 
 of lamps that may be connected to one machine is limited by the 
 maximum allowable voltage on that machine. By special construction 
 as many as 125 lamps are run from one machine, but even this size 
 of generator is not so efficient as one of greater capacity. Such gen- 
 erators are usually wound for 6.6 or 9.6 amperes. Since the carbons 
 are exposed to the air at the arc, they are rapidly consumed, requiring 
 that they be renewed daily for this type of lamp. 
 
 Double-carbon arcs. In order to increase the life of the early 
 form of arc lamp without using too long a carbon, the double-carbon 
 type was introduced. This type uses two sets of carbons, both sets 
 being fed by one mechanism so arranged that when one pair of the elec- 
 trodes is consumed the other is put into service. At present nearly 
 all forms of the open arc lamp have disappeared on account of the 
 better service rendered by the enclosed arc. 
 
 Enclosed arcs for series systems are constructed much the same 
 as the open lamp, and are controlled by either shunt or differential 
 mechanism. They require a voltage from 68 to 75 at the arc, and are 
 usually constructed for from 5 to 6.8 amperes. They also require a 
 constant-current generator or a rectifier outfit if used on alternating- 
 current circuits. 
 
 Constant-potential arcs must have some resistance connected in 
 series with them to keep the voltage at the arc at its proper value. 
 This resistance is made adjustable so that the lamps may be used on 
 any circuit. Its location is clearly shown in Fig. 38, one coil being 
 located above, the other below the operating solenoids. 
 
 Alternating-Current Arcs. These do not differ greatly in con- 
 struction from the direct-current arcs. When iron or other metal 
 parts are used in the controlling mechanism, they must be laminated 
 or so constructed as to keep down induced or eddy currents which 
 might be set up in them. For this reason the metal spools, on which 
 the solenoids are wound, are slotted at some point to prevent them 
 from forming a closed secondary to the primary formed by the solen- 
 oid winding. On constant-potential circuits a reactive coil is used 
 
40 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 in place of a part of the resistance for cutting down the voltage at the 
 arc. 
 
 Interchangeable Arc. Interchangeable arcs are manufactured 
 which may be readily adjusted so as to operate on either direct or 
 alternating current, and on voltages from 110 to 220. Two lamps 
 may be run in series on 220-volt circuits. 
 
 The distribution of light, and the resulting illumination for the 
 different lamps just considered, will be taken up later. Aside from 
 the distribution and quality of light, the enclosed arc has the advan- 
 tage that the carbons are not consumed so rapidly as in the open lamp 
 because the oxygen is soon exhausted from the inner globe and the 
 combustion of the carbon is greatly decreased. They will burn 
 from 80 to 100 hours without retrimming. 
 
 TABLE X 
 Rating of Enclosed Arcs 
 
 
 
 WATTS CONSUMED 
 
 MEAN INTENSITY 
 IN H. U. 
 
 MEAN WATTS 
 
 Oi 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 2 
 
 SPHERICAL 
 
 aj , M 
 ^. S a 
 
 SPHERICAL 
 H. U. 
 
 ^ i ^ 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 (X 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 
 a 
 
 ti 
 
 
 llsi 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 MK d 
 
 
 P. 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 M 
 
 A 
 
 H 
 
 00 
 
 CO 
 
 CLEAR 
 OUTER 
 
 00 
 
 oo 
 
 
 CLEAR 
 OUTER 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 235 
 
 332 
 
 
 2.37 
 
 1.66 
 
 1 
 
 5.01 
 
 551 
 
 401 
 
 150 
 
 172 
 
 256* 
 
 362* 
 
 3.10 
 
 2.18* 
 
 1 .52* 
 
 3 
 
 5.08 
 
 559 
 
 406 
 
 252 
 
 195 
 
 216 
 
 282 
 
 2.85 
 
 2.60 
 
 1.99 
 
 4 
 
 4.76 
 
 524 
 
 381 
 
 143 
 
 127 
 
 139 
 
 208 
 
 4.12 
 
 3.76 
 
 2.52 
 
 5 
 
 4.16f 
 
 458 
 
 333 
 
 125 
 
 154 
 
 174 
 
 221 
 
 2.96 
 
 2.63 
 
 2.07 
 
 7 
 
 4.76 
 
 524 
 
 381 
 
 143 
 
 203 
 
 333 
 
 317 
 
 2.63 
 
 2.20 
 
 1.65 
 
 9 
 
 4.84 
 
 532 
 
 387 
 
 145 
 
 182 
 
 226 
 
 281 
 
 2.83 
 
 2.38 
 
 1.89 
 
 10 
 
 4 99 
 
 549 
 
 399 
 
 150 
 
 202 
 
 242 
 
 309 
 
 2.74 
 
 2 24 
 
 1 .77 
 
 12 
 
 4.87 
 
 536 
 
 3CO 
 
 146 
 
 178 
 
 195 
 
 230 
 
 3.05 
 
 2^66 
 
 2.33 
 
 Mean 
 
 4.9 
 
 529 
 
 384 
 
 144 
 
 176 
 
 207 
 
 272 
 
 3.03 
 
 2.60 
 
 1.98 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Jj 
 
 H 
 
 cu 
 
 P5 
 
 o 
 
 tf 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 "i O 
 
 
 
 i O 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 tf 
 
 PH 
 
 j 
 
 * o S 
 
 
 o u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 < ! 
 
 
 
 <! PS 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 I I 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 101 
 
 6.40 
 
 448 
 
 .63 
 
 340 
 
 .82 
 
 108 
 
 127 
 
 141 
 
 206 
 
 3.52 
 
 3.17 
 
 2.17 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 203 
 
 236 
 
 
 2.26 
 
 1 .94 
 
 102 
 
 6.79 
 
 459 
 
 .61 
 
 375 
 
 .73 
 
 84 
 
 146 
 
 176f 
 
 226t 
 
 3.31 
 
 2.60t 
 
 1.72t 
 
 103 
 
 5.89 
 
 424 
 
 .65 
 
 344 
 
 .75 
 
 80 
 
 116 
 
 130 
 
 147 
 
 3.66 
 
 3.15 
 
 2.88 
 
 105 
 
 6.20 
 
 414 
 
 .61 
 
 382 
 
 .80 
 
 32 
 
 128 
 
 187 
 
 219 
 
 3.24 
 
 2.20 
 
 1.89 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 153 
 
 169 
 
 
 2.56 
 
 2.23 
 
 106 
 
 6.12 
 
 378 
 
 .56 
 
 298 
 
 .70 
 
 80 
 
 132 
 
 182t 
 
 284 
 
 2.82 
 
 2.19t 
 
 1.48f 
 
 108 
 
 6.48 
 
 457 
 
 .64 
 
 383 
 
 .80 
 
 74.5 
 
 133 
 
 175 
 
 211 
 
 3.20 
 
 2.61 
 
 2.16 
 
 110 
 
 6.18 
 
 339 
 
 .49 
 
 276 
 
 .72 
 
 63 
 
 140* 
 
 126 
 
 143 
 
 2.41* 
 
 2.68 
 
 2.37 
 
 Mean 
 
 6.29 417 
 
 .60 
 
 342 
 
 .76 
 
 74.5 
 
 130 
 
 159 
 
 190 
 
 3.31 
 
 2.66 
 
 2.23 
 
 *Condition of no outer globe. fCondition with shade on lamp. H.U. Hefner Units. 
 
 Rating of Arc Lamps. 
 
 follows : 
 
 Open arcs have been classified as 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 41 
 
 Full Arcs, 2,000 candle-power taking 9.5 to 10 amps, or 450-480 watts. 
 Half Arcs, 1,200 candle-power taking 6.5 to 7 amps, or 325-350 watts. 
 
 These candle-power ratings are much too high, and run more 
 nearly 1,200 and 700, respectively, for the point of maximum intensity 
 and less than this if the mean spherical candle-power be taken. For 
 this reason, the ampere or watt rating is now used to indicate the 
 power of the lamp. It is now recommended that specifications for 
 street lighting should be based upon the illumination produced. This 
 point is considered later under the topic of street lighting. Enclosed 
 arcs use from 3 to 6.5 amperes, but the voltage at the arc is higher 
 than for the open lamp. Table X gives some data on enclosed arcs 
 on constant-potential circuits. 
 
 Efficiency. The efficiency o e arc lamps is given as follows: 
 
 Direct-Current Arc (enclosed) 2.9 watts per candle-power. 
 Alternating-Current Arc (enclosed) 2.95 watts per candle-power. 
 Direct-Current Arc (open) .6-1.25 watts per candle-power. 
 
 Carbons for Arc Lamps. Carbons are either moulded or forced 
 from a product known as petroleum coke or from similar materials 
 such as lampblack. The material is thoroughly dried by heating to a 
 high temperature, then ground to a find powder, and combined with 
 some substance such as pitch which binds the fine particles of carbon 
 together. After this mixture is again ground it is ready for moulding. 
 The powder is put in steel moulds and heated until it takes the form 
 of a paste, when the necessary pressure is applied to the moulds. For 
 the forced carbons, the powder is formed into cylinders which are 
 placed in machines which force the material through a die so arranged 
 as to give the desired diameter. The forced carbons are often made 
 with a core of some special material, this core being added after the 
 carbon proper has been finished. The carbons, whether moulded 
 or forced, must be carefully baked to drive off all volatile matter. 
 The forced carbon is always more uniform in quality and cross- 
 section, and is the type of carbon which must be used in the carbon- 
 feed lamp. The adding of a core of a different material seems to 
 change the quality of light, and being more readily volatilized, keeps 
 the arc from wandering. 
 
 Plating of carbons with copper is sometimes resorted to for 
 moulded forms for the purpose of increasing the conductivity, and, 
 by protecting the carbon near the arc* prolonging the life. 
 
42 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 The Flaming Arc. In the carbon arc the arc proper gives out 
 but a small percentage of the total amount of light emitted. In order 
 to obtain a light in which more of the source of luminosity is in the 
 arc itself, experiments have been made with the use of electrodes im- 
 pregnated with certain salts, as well as with electrodes of a material 
 different than carbon. The result of these experiments has been to 
 place upon the market the flaming arc lamps and the luminous arc 
 lamps lamps of high candle-power, good efficiency, and giving vari- 
 ous colors of light. These lamps may be put in two classes : One class 
 uses carbon electrodes, these electrodes being impregnated with certain 
 
 salts w T hich add luminosity to the 
 arc, or else fitted with cores which 
 contain the required material; 
 the other class covering lamps 
 which do not employ carbon, the 
 most notable example being the 
 magnetite arc which uses a copper 
 segment as one electrode and a 
 magnetite stick as the other 
 electrode. 
 
 Flaming arcs of the first class 
 Fig. 39. Diagram of Bremer Flaming Arc. are made in two general types: 
 
 One in which the electrodes are 
 
 placed at an angle, and the other in which the carbons are placed 
 one above the other as in the ordinary arc lamp. The term lumi- 
 nous arc is usually applied to arcs of the flaming type in which the 
 electrodes are placed one above the other. The minor modifications 
 as introduced by the various manufacturers are numerous and include 
 such features as a magazine supply of electrodes by which a new pair 
 may be automatically introduced when one pair is consumed; feed 
 and control mechanisms; etc. The flaming arc presents a special 
 problem since the vapors given off by the lamp may condense on the 
 glassware and form a partially opaque coating, or they may interfere 
 with the control mechanism. 
 
 Bremer Arc. The Bremer flaming arc lamp was introduced 
 commercially in 1899, and since some of its principles are incorporated 
 in many of the lamps on the market to-day, it will be briefly described 
 here. The diagram shown in Fig. 39 illustrates the main features of 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 43 
 
 this lamp. The electrodes are mounted at an angle and an electro- 
 magnet is placed above the arc for the purpose of keeping the arc from 
 creeping up and injuring the economizer, and also for the purpose of 
 spreading the arc out and increasing its surface. The vapor from 
 the arc is condensed on the economizer and this coating acts as a re- 
 flector, throwing the light downward. The economizer serves to 
 limit the air supplied to the arc and thus increases the life of the elec- 
 trodes. The inclined position of the carbons was suggested by the 
 fact that in the impregnated carbons a slag was formed which gave 
 trouble when the electrodes were mounted in the usual manner. By 
 using the electrodes in 
 this position there is little 
 if any obstruction to the 
 light which passes di- 
 rectly downward from 
 the arc. 
 
 Bremer's original 
 electrodes contained 
 compounds of calcium, 
 strontium, magnesium, 
 etc., as well as boracic 
 acid. Electrodes as em- 
 ployed in the various 
 lamps to-day differ 
 greatly in their make-up. 
 Some use impregnated 
 
 carbons, others use carbons with a core containing the flaming ma- 
 terials, and metallic wires are added in some cases. The life of 
 electrodes for flaming lamps is not great, depending upon their length 
 and somewhat upon the type of lamp. The maximum life of the 
 treated carbons is in the neighborhood of 20 hours. 
 
 The color of the light from the flaming arc is yellow when cal- 
 cium salts are used as the main impregnating compound, and the 
 majority of the lamps installed use electrodes giving a yellow light. 
 By employing more strontium, a red or pink light is produced, while 
 if a white light is wanted, barium salts are used. Calcium gives the 
 most efficient service and strontium comes between this and barium. 
 The distribution curves in Fig. 40 illustrate the relative economies 
 
 Fig. 40. Distribution Curves of a Luminous Arc. 
 
44 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 of the different materials. Modern electrodes contain not more than 
 15% of added material and it is customary to find the salts applied 
 as a core to the pure carbon sticks. The electrodes are made of a 
 small diameter in order to maintain a steady light and this partially 
 accounts for their short life. 
 
 The feeding mechanisms employed differ greatly. They may be 
 classified as: Clock, gravity-feed, clutch, motor, and hot-wire mech- 
 anisms. Fig. 41 illustrates a clock mechanism. This is a dif- 
 ferential mechanism in which the 
 shunt coils act to release a detent / 
 which allows the electrodes to feed 
 down and when they come in con- 
 tact the series coils separate them 
 to the proper extent for maintaining 
 a suitable arc. In the gravity feed 
 an electromagnet is used to operate 
 one carbon in springing the arc and 
 the other carbon is fed by gravity, 
 it being prevented from dropping 
 too far by means of a special rib 
 formed on the electrode which comes 
 in contact with a part of the lamp 
 structure. Gravity feed is also em- 
 ployed in the clutch mechanism but 
 here the carbons are held in one 
 position by an electrically operated 
 clutch which releases them only when 
 the current is sufficiently reduced by 
 the lengthening of the arc. In the 
 
 hot-wire lamp, the wire is usually in series with the arc; the contrac- 
 tion and expansion of this wire is balanced against a spring and the 
 arc is regulated by such contraction or expansion of the wire. Such 
 a lamp is suitable for either direct or alternating current. In the 
 motor mechanism, as applied to alternating-current lamps, a metallic 
 disk is actuated by differential magnets and its motion is transmitted 
 to the electrodes to lengthen or shorten the arc accordingly as the 
 force exerted by the series or shunt coils predominates. 
 
 Magnetite Arc. The magnetite arc employs a copper disk as 
 
 Fig. 41. Clock Feeding Mechanism for 
 Luminous Arc Lamp. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 45 
 
 one electrode; and a magnetite stick formed by forcing magnetite, 
 to which titanium salts are usually added, into a thin sheet steel tube 
 is used as the other electrode. This lamp gives a luminous arc of 
 good efficiency and the magnetite electrode is not consumed as rapidly 
 as the treated carbons with the result that magnetite lamps do not 
 require trimming as frequently. The life of the magnetite electrode 
 as at present manufactured is from 170 to 200 hours. A diagram of 
 the connections of this lamp as manufactured by the General Electric 
 
 Starting 
 Maonet 
 
 (s 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 f or ting Resist an c 
 
 1 
 
 Fig. 42. Diagram of Connections for Magnetite Arc Lamp. 
 
 Company is shown in Fig. 42. The magnetite electrode is placed be- 
 low. The copper electrode has just the proper dimensions to prevent 
 its being destroyed by the arc and yet it is not large enough to cause 
 undue condensation of the arc vapor. Direct current must be used 
 with this lamp, the current passing from the copper to the magnetite. 
 Table XI gives some general data on the flaming arc, while Figs. 
 43 and 44 give typical distribution curves. The advantages of the 
 flaming arc over lamps using pure carbon electrodes are: High effi- 
 ciency; better light distribution; and better color of light for some 
 
46 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 purposes. A greater amount of light can be obtained from a single 
 unit than is practical with the carbon arc. The disadvantages lie 
 in the frequent trimming required and the expense of electrodes. 
 Flaming arcs have been introduced abroad, especially in Germany, 
 to a much greater extent than in the United States. 
 
 TABLE XI 
 General Data on Flaming Arcs 
 
 VOLTS 
 
 AMPERES 
 
 WATTS 
 
 MEAN SPHERICAL 
 CANDLE-POWER 
 
 WATTS PER MEAN 
 SPHERICAL c. P. 
 
 55 
 
 6 
 
 330 
 
 480 
 
 .68 
 
 
 8 
 
 440 
 
 800 
 
 .55 
 
 
 10 
 
 550 
 
 1100 
 
 .5 - 
 
 
 12 
 
 660 
 
 1300 
 
 .5 
 
 
 15 
 
 825 
 
 1700 
 
 .49 
 
 
 20 
 
 1100 
 
 2250 
 
 .48 
 
 POWER DISTRIBUTION 
 
 The question of power distribution for electric lamps and other 
 appliances is taken up fully in the section on that subject, therefore 
 it will be treated very briefly here. The systems may be divided into : 
 
 1. Series distribution systems. 
 
 2. Multiple-series or series-multiple systems. 
 
 3. Multiple or parallel systems. 
 
 They apply to both alternating and direct current. 
 
 The Series System. This is the most simple of the three; the 
 lamps, as the name indicates, are connected in series as shown in 
 Fig. 45. A constant load is necessary if a constant potential is to be 
 used. If the load is variable, a constant-current generator, or a 
 special regulating device is necessary. Such devices are constant- 
 current transformers and constant-current regulators as applied to 
 alternating-current circuits. 
 
 The series system is used mostly for arc and incandescent lamps 
 when applied to street illumination. Its advantages are simplicity 
 and saving of copper. Its disadvantages are high voltage, fixed by 
 the number of lamps in series; the size of the machines is limited 
 since they cannot be insulated for voltage above about 6,000; a single 
 open circuit shuts down the whole system. 
 
 Alternating-current series distribution systems are being used to 
 a very large extent. By the aid of special transformers, or regulators, 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 47 
 
 any number of circuits can be run from one machine or set of bus bars, 
 and apparatus can be built for any voltage and of any size. It is not 
 customary, however, to build transformers of this type having a capac- 
 
 o 
 
 6O 75" 90' 75 SO' 
 
 Fig. 43. Distribution Curve for Flaming Arc Lamp. 
 
 ity greater than one hundred 6.6-ampere lamps because of the high 
 voltage which would have to be induced in the secondary for a larger 
 number of lamps. 
 
 Fig. 45 gives a dia- 
 gram of the connection 
 of a single-coil trans- 
 fermer in service. The 
 
 constant-current trans- oV- IL^I^ JCJ4--UI jo 
 
 /o" 
 
 20' 
 
 Luminous Arc Lamp 
 Direct current series circuit 
 Distribution 
 
 30 
 
 former most in use for 
 lighting purposes is the 20" 
 one manufactured by the 
 General Electric Com- 
 pany and commonly 
 known as a tub trans- 
 former. Fig. 46 shows such a transformer (double-coil type) when 
 removed from the case. 
 
 Referring to Fig. 46, the fixed coils A form the primaries which 
 are connected across the line; the movable coils B are the secondaries 
 
 40" 50' 6 0' TO'SCrSO* 80 70*60' 50 4-0 
 
 Fig. 44. Distribution Curve for a 4-Ampere, 
 
 75-\olt, Magnetite Luminous Arc Lamp. 
 
48 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 SECONDARY 
 
 -X X X X X X- 
 LAMPS 
 
 connected to the lamps. There is a repulsion of the coils B by the 
 coils A when the current flows in both circuits and this force is bal- 
 anced by means of the weights at W, so that the coils B take a position 
 such that the normal current will flow in the secondary. On light 
 loads, a low voltage is sufficient, hence the secondary coils are close 
 
 together near the middle of 
 the machine and there is a 
 heavy magnetic leakage. 
 When all of the lamps are 
 on, the coils take the posi- 
 tion shown when the leak- 
 age is a minimum and the 
 voltage a maximum. When 
 first starting up, the trans- 
 former is short-circuited and 
 the secondary coils brought 
 close together. The short 
 circuit is then removed and 
 the coils take a position 
 corresponding to the load 
 on the line. 
 
 These transformers regu- 
 late from full load to J rated 
 load within T V ampere of 
 normal current, and can be 
 run on short circuit for 
 
 C PRIMARY PLUG SWITCH several hours without over- 
 heating. The efficiency is 
 given as 96% for 100-light 
 transformers and 94.6% for 
 50-light transformers at full 
 
 load. The power factor of the system is from 76 to 78% on full 
 load, and, owing to the great amount of magnetic leakage at less than 
 full load the effect of leakage being the same as the effect of an in- 
 ductance in the primary the power factor is greatly reduced, falling 
 to 62% at f load, 44% at J load, and 24% at J load. 
 
 Standard sizes are for capacities of 25-, 35-, 50-, 75-, and 100-6.6 
 ampere enclosed arcs, and they are also made for lower currents in 
 
 SHORT CIRCUITING 
 PLUG SWITCH 
 
 CURRENT 
 TRANSFORMER 
 OMIT FOR 
 25 LIGHTS 
 
 OPEN CIRCUITING 
 PLUG SWITCHES 
 
 CONSTANT CURRENT 
 TRANSFORMER 
 
 RESISTANCE 
 
 FUSE 
 
 WMV 
 
 POTENTIAL 
 TRANSFORMER 
 
 PRIMARY 
 BACK VIEW 
 
 Fig. 45. 
 
 Wiring Diagram for Single-Coil 
 Transformer. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 49 
 
50 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 the neighborhood of 3.3 amperes for incandescent lamps. The low 
 power factor of such a system on light loads shows that a transformer 
 should be selected of such a capacity that it will be fully or nearly 
 fully loaded at all times. The primary winding can be constructed 
 for any voltage and the open circuit voltages of the secondaries are 
 as follows : 
 
 25 light transformer, 2,300 volts. 
 35 " " 3,200 " 
 
 50 " " 4,600 " 
 
 75 light transformer, 6,900 volts. 
 100 " " 9,200 " 
 
 The 50-, 75-, and 100-light transformers are arranged for multiple 
 
 circuit operation, two circuits 
 used in series, and the vol- 
 tages at full load reach 4,100 
 for each circuit on the 100-light 
 machine. 
 
 The second system, used 
 for series distribution on 
 alternating-current circuits 
 consists of a constant-potential 
 transformer, stepping down the 
 line voltage to that required 
 for the total number of lamps 
 on the system, allowing 83 
 volts for each lamp, and in 
 series with the lamps is a 
 reactive coil, the reactance of 
 which is automatically regu- 
 lated, as the load is increased 
 or decreased, in order to keep 
 
 Fig. 47. Current Regulator for A. C. Series ^ 
 
 Distribution Systems. the current in the line con- 
 
 stant. Fig. 47 shows such a regulator and Fig. 48 shows this regu- 
 lator connected in circuit. The inductance is varied by the move- 
 ment of the coil so as to include more or less iron in. the magnetic 
 circuit. Since the inductance in series with the lamps is high on light 
 loads, the power factor is greatly reduced as in the constant-current 
 transformer; and the circuits should, preferably, be run fully loaded. 
 60 to 65 lamps on a circuit is the usual maximum limit. 
 
 While used primarily for arc-light circuits, the same systems, 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 51 
 
 designed for lower currents, are very readily applied to series incan- 
 descent systems. 
 
 The introduction of certain flaming or luminous arcs requiring 
 direct current for their operation has led to the use of the mercury arc 
 rectifier in connection with series circuits on alternating-current 
 systems. A constant-current transformer is used to regulate for the 
 proper constant current in its second- 
 ary winding, and this secondary current 
 is rectified by means of the mercury arc 
 rectifier for the lamp circuit. In the 
 recent outfits the rectifier tubes are 
 immersed in oil for cooling. While 
 this rectifier was first introduced for 
 the operation of luminous arc lamps, 
 there is no reason why it should not 
 be used with any series lamp requiring KICKING 
 direct current, provided the system is 
 designed for the current taken by such 
 lamps. With this system any commer- 
 cial frequency may be used. Sets are 
 constructed for 25-, 50-, and 75-light 
 circuits. They have a combined effi- 
 ciency, transformer and rectifier tube, 
 of 85% to 90%, and operate at a power 
 factor of from 65% to 70%. Fig. 49 
 gives a diagram of the circuit and 
 
 rectifier connections USed with a single- Fig. 48. Wiring Diagram Showing In- 
 , n , troduction of the Current Regulator. 
 
 tube outfit. 
 
 Multiple= Series or Series= Multiple Systems. These combine 
 several lamps in series, and these series groups in multiple, or several 
 lamps in multiple and these multiple groups in series, respectively. 
 They have but a limited application. 
 
 Multiple or Parallel Systems of Distribution. By far the largest 
 number of lamps in service are connected to parallel systems of dis- 
 tribution. In this system, the units are connected across the lines 
 leading to the bus bars at the station, or to the secondaries of con- 
 stant-potential transformers. Fig. 50 shows a diagram of ten lamps 
 connected in parallel. The current delivered by the machine de- 
 
 C.P. STEP UP 
 OR STtlPDOWN 
 TRANSFORMER 
 
 UGHTNING 
 ARRESTERS 
 
52 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 pends directly on the number of lamps connected in service, the vol- 
 tage of the system being kept constant. 
 
 Inasmuch as the flow of current in a conductor is always accom- 
 . panied by a fall 
 
 -tzsACBusses\ 
 
 Fig. 49. 
 
 various 
 systems 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 4. 
 
 of potential equal 
 to the product of 
 the current flow- 
 ing into the resist- 
 ance of the con- 
 ductor, the lamps 
 at the end of the 
 system shown 
 will not have as 
 high a voltage 
 impressed upon 
 them as those 
 nearer the ma- 
 chine. This 
 drop in potential 
 is the most seri- 
 ous obstacle that 
 we have to over- 
 
 AViring Diagram for A. C. System Showing Introduc- come in multiple 
 tion of Mercury Arc Rectifier. 
 
 systems, and 
 
 schemes have been adopted to aid in this regulation. The 
 may be classified as : 
 
 Cylindrical conductors, parallel feeding. 
 
 Conical 
 
 Cylindrical anti-parallel feeding. 
 
 Conical 
 
 In the cylindrical conductor, parallel-feeding system, the con- 
 ductors, A, B,C, D, Fig. 50, are of the same size throughout and are 
 fed at the same end by the generator. The voltage is a minimum 
 at the lamps E and a maximum at the lamps F; the value of the 
 voltage at any lamp being readily calculated. 
 
 By a conical or tapering conductor is meant a conductor whose 
 diameter is so proportioned throughout its length that the current, 
 divided by the cross-section, or the current density, is a constant 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 53 
 
 Fig. 50. Parallel Feeding System. 
 
 Fig. 51. Anti-parallel Feeding System. 
 
 quantity. Such a conductor is approximated in practice by using 
 smaller sizes of wire as the current in the lines becomes less. 
 
 In an anti-parallel system, the current is fed to the lamps from 
 opposite ends of the system, as shown in Fig. 51. 
 
 Multiple=Wire Systems. In order to take advantage of a higher 
 voltage for distribution of power to the lighting circuits, three- and 
 five-wire systems have been introduced, the three-wire system being 
 used to a very large extent. In this system, three conductors are 
 used, the voltage from each A B 
 
 outside conductor to the 
 middle neutral conductor 
 being the same as for a 
 simple parallel system. Fig. 
 52 gives a diagram of this. 
 By this system the amount 
 of copper required for a giv- 
 en number of lamps is from 
 five-sixteenths to three- 
 eighths of the amount 
 required for a two-wire dis- 
 tribution, depending on the 
 
 size of the neutral con- Fig 52 Three . wire System . 
 
 ductor. The saving of 
 
 copper together with the disadvantages of the system is more fully 
 treated in the paper on "Power Transmission." 
 
 ILLUMINATION 
 
 Illumination may be defined as the quality and quantity of light 
 which aids in the discrimination of outline and the perception of 
 color. Not only the quantity, but the quality of the light, as well as 
 the arrangement of the units, must be considered in a complete study 
 of the subject of illumination. 
 
 Unit of Illumination. The unit of illumination is the joot- 
 candle and its value is the amount of light falling on a surface at a 
 distance of one foot from a source of light one candle-power in value. 
 The law of inverse squares namely, that the illumination from a 
 given source varies inversely as the square of the distance from the 
 source shows that the illumination at a distance of two feet from a 
 
54 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 single candle-power unit is .25 foot-candles. For further con- 
 sideration of the law of inverse squares, see "Photometry." 
 
 Illumination may be classified as use/lit when used for the 
 ordinary purposes of furnishing light for carrying on work, taking 
 the place of daylight; and scenic when used for decorative lighting 
 such as stage lighting, etc. The two divisions are not, as a rule, 
 distinct, but the one is combined with the other. 
 
 Intrinsic Brightness. By intrinsic brightness is meant the 
 amount of light emitted per uirt surface of the light source. Table 
 XII gives the intrinsic brightness of several light sources. 
 
 TABLE XII 
 Intrinsic Brilliancies in Candle-Power per Square Inch 
 
 SOURCE 
 
 BRILLIANCY 
 
 NOTES 
 
 Sun in zenith 
 
 600,000 ) 
 
 
 Sun at 30 degrees elv. 
 
 500,000 
 
 Rough equivalent values, tak- 
 
 Sun on horizon 
 
 2,000 ) 
 
 ing account of absorption 
 
 
 10,000) 
 
 
 Arc light 
 
 to [ 
 
 Maximum about 200,000 in 
 
 
 100,000 ) 
 
 crater 
 
 Calcium light 
 
 5,000 
 
 
 Nernst "glower" 
 
 1,000 
 
 Unshaded 
 
 Incandescent lamp 
 
 200-300 
 
 Depending on efficiency 
 
 Enclosed arc 
 
 75-100 
 
 Opalescent inner globe 
 
 Acetylene flame 
 
 75-100 
 
 
 Welsbach light 
 
 20 to 25 
 
 
 Kerosene light 
 
 4 to 8 
 
 Variable 
 
 Candle 
 
 3 to 4 
 
 
 Gas flame 
 
 3 to 8 
 
 Variable 
 
 Incandescent (frosted) 
 
 2 to 5 
 
 
 Opal shaded lamps, etc. 
 
 0.5 to 2 
 
 
 Regular Reflection. Regular reflection is the term applied to 
 reflection of light when the reflected rays are parallel. It is of such 
 a nature that the image of the light source is seen in the reflection. 
 The reflection from a plane mirror is an example of this. It is useful 
 in lighting in that the direction of light may be changed without com- 
 plicating calculations aside from deductions necessary to compensate 
 for the small amount of light absorbed. 
 
 Irregular Reflection. Irregular reflection, or diffusion, consists 
 of reflection in which the reflected rays of light are not parallel but 
 take various directions, thus destroying the image of the light source. 
 Rough, unpolished surfaces give such reflection. Smooth, unpolished 
 surfaces generally give a combination of two kinds of reflection. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 55 
 
 Diffused reflection is very important in the study of illumination 
 inasmuch as diffused light plays an important part in the lighting of 
 interiors. This form of reflection is seen in many photometer screens. 
 Light is also diffused when passing through semi-transparent shades 
 or screens. 
 
 In considering reflected light, we find that, if the surface on 
 which the light falls is colored, the reflected light may be changed in 
 its nature by the absorption of some of the colors. Since, as has been 
 said, in interior lighting the reflected light forms a large part of the 
 source of illumination, this illumination will depend upon the nature 
 and the color of the reflecting surfaces. 
 
 Whenever light is reflected from a surface, either by direct or 
 diffused reflection, a certain amount of light is absorbed by the surface. 
 Table XIII gives the amount of white light reflected from different 
 materials. 
 
 TABLE XIII 
 Relative Reflecting Power 
 
 MATERIAL 
 
 White blotting paper 
 
 White cartridge paper 
 
 Chrome yellow paper 
 
 Orange paper 
 
 Yellow wall paper 
 
 Light pink paper 
 
 Yellow cardboard 
 
 Light blue cardboard 
 
 Emerald green paper 
 
 Dark brown paper 
 
 Vermilion paper 
 
 Blue-green paper 
 
 Black paper 
 
 Black cloth 
 
 Black velvet 
 
 82 
 80 
 62 
 50 
 40 
 36 
 30 
 25 
 18 
 13 
 12 
 12 
 5 
 
 1.2 
 
 From this table it is seen that the light-colored papers reflect the 
 light well, but of the darker colors only yellow has a comparatively 
 high coefficient of reflection. Black velvet has the lowest value, but 
 this only holds when the material is free from dust. Rooms with 
 dark walls require a greater amount of illuminating power, as will be 
 seen later. 
 
 Useful illumination may be considered under the following 
 heads: 
 
56 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 1. Residence Lighting. 
 
 2. Lighting of Public Halls, Offices, Drafting Rooms, Shops, etc. 
 
 3. Street Lighting. 
 
 RESIDENCE LIGHTING 
 
 Type of Lamps. The lamps used for this class of lighting are 
 limited to the less powerful units namely, incandescent or Nernst 
 lamps varying in candle-power from 8 to 50 per unit. These should 
 always be shaded so as to keep the intrinsic brightness low. The 
 intrinsic brilliancy should seldom exceed 2 to 3 candle-power per 
 square inch, and its reduction is usually accomplished by appropriate 
 shading. Arc lights are so powerful as to be uneconomical for 
 small rooms, while the color of the mercury-vapor light is an additional 
 objection to its use. 
 
 Plan of Illumination. Lamps may be selected and so located 
 as to give a brilliant and fairly uniform illumination in a room; but this 
 is an uneconomical scheme, and the one more commonly employed 
 is to furnish a uniform, though comparatively weak, ground illumi- 
 nation, and to reinforce this at points where it is necessary or desirable. 
 The latter plan is satisfactory in almost all cases and the more eco- 
 nomical of the two. 
 
 While the use of units of different power is to be recommended, 
 where desirable, lights differing in color should not be used for lighting 
 the same room. As an exaggerated case, the use of arc with incan- 
 descent lamps might be mentioned. The arcs being so much whiter 
 than the incandescent lamps, the latter appear distinctly yellow when 
 the two are viewed at the same time. 
 
 Calculation of Illumination. Jn determining the value of illumi- 
 nation, not only the candle-power of the units, but the amount of re- 
 flected light must be considered for the given location of the lamps. 
 Following is a formula based on the coefficient of reflection of the 
 walls of the room, which serves for preliminary calculations: 
 
 d* 
 
 I = Illumination in foot-candles. 
 c.p. = Candle-power of the unit. 
 Jc = Coefficient of reflection of the walls. 
 d = distance from the unit in feet. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 57 
 
 Where several units of the same candle-power are used this 
 formula becomes: 
 
 > ( 1 
 
 d 2 d 2 t d 2 ^ I - k 
 
 c.p. j p 
 
 ( -77- 4~ 79 + ~~TT ~f~ 
 
 1- k 
 
 where d, d v d v etc., equal the distances from the point considered to 
 the various light sources. If the lamps are of different candle-power, 
 the illumination, may be determined by combining the illumination 
 from each source as calculated separately. An example of calculation 
 is given under "Arrangement of Lamps." 
 
 The above method is not strictly accurate because it does not 
 take account of the angle at which the light from each one of the 
 sources strikes the assumed plane of illumination. If the ray of 
 
 C T) 
 
 light is perpendicular to the plane, the formula I = ^ gives cor- 
 rect values. If a is the angle which the ray of light makes with a line 
 drawn from the light source perpendicular to the assumed plane, 
 
 then the formula becomes I = C + X %*** ' Therefore, by 
 
 or 
 
 multiplying the candle-power value of each light source in the direc- 
 tion of the illuminated point by the cosine of each angle a, a more 
 accurate result will be obtained. 
 
 It is readily seen that the effect of reflected light from the ceilings 
 is of more importance than that from the floor of a room. The value 
 of k, in the above formula, will vary from 60% to 10%, but for rooms 
 with a fairly light finish 50% may be taken as a good average value. 
 
 The amount of illumination will depend on the use to be made of 
 the room. One foot-candle gives sufficient illumination for easy 
 reading, when measured normal to the page, and probably an illumi- 
 nation of .5 foot-candle on a plane 3 feet from the floor forms a suffi- 
 cient ground illumination. The illumination from sunlight reflected 
 from white clouds is from 20 foot-candles up, while that due to moon- 
 light is in the neighborhood of .03 foot-candles. It is not possible to 
 produce artificially a light equivalent to daylight on account of the 
 
58 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 great amount of energy that would be required and the difficulty of 
 obtaining proper diffusion. 
 
 The method of calculating the illumination of a room that has 
 just been described is known as the point-by-point method and it 
 gives very accurate results if account is taken of the angle at which 
 the light from each source strikes the plane of illumination and if 
 the light distribution curves of the units, and the value of k, have been 
 carefully determined. Under these conditions the calculations be- 
 come extended and complicated and methods only approximate, but 
 simpler in their application, are being introduced. One method, 
 which gives good results when applied to fairly large interiors, makes 
 the flux of light from the light sources the basis of calculation of the 
 average illumination. 
 
 Flux of light is measured in lumens and a lumen may be defined 
 as the amount of light which must fall on one square foot of surface 
 in order to produce a uniform illumination of an intensity of one foot- 
 candle. A source of light giving one candle-power in every direction 
 and placed at the center of a sphere of one foot radius would give an 
 illumination of one foot-candle at every point in the surface of the 
 sphere and the total flux of light would be 4?r, or 12.57, lumens since 
 the area of the sphere would be 4?r, or 12.57, sq. ft. A lamp giving 
 one mean spherical candle-power gives a flux of 12.57 lumens and 
 the total flux of light from any source is obtained by multiplying its 
 mean spherical candle-power by 12.57. In calculating illumination 
 it is customary to determine the illumination on a plane about 30 
 inches from the floor for desk work, and about 42 inches from the 
 floor for the display of goods on counters. If we determine the total 
 number of lumens falling on this plane and divide this number by 
 the area of the plane, we obtain the average illumination in foot- 
 candles. This of course tells us nothing about the maximum or 
 minimum value of the illumination and such values must be obtained 
 by other methods if they are desired. Reflected light, other than that 
 covered by the distribution curve of the light unit including its re- 
 flector, is usually neglected in this method of calculation. 
 
 We may assume that in large rooms the light coming from the 
 lamp within an angle of 75 degrees from the vertical reaches the plane 
 of illumination. In smaller rooms this angle should be reduced to 
 about 60 degrees. In order to determine the flux of light within this 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 59 
 
 angle a Rousseau diagram, which is described later, should be drawn. 
 By the means of this diagram the average candle-power of the light 
 source within the angle assumed may be readily determined and this 
 mean value, multiplied by 12.57, will give the flux of light in lumens. 
 This method of calculation, together with some guides for its rapid 
 application, is described by Messrs. Cravath and Lansingh in the 
 "Transactions of the Illuminating Engineering Society, 1908." The 
 same authorities give the following useful data: 
 
 To determine the watts required per square foot of floor area, 
 multiply the intensity of illumination desired by the constants given 
 as follows: 
 
 INTENSITY CONSTANTS FOR INCANDESCENT LAMPS 
 
 Tungsten lamps rated at 1.25 watts per horizontal candle-power; clear 
 prismatic reflectors, either bowl or concentrating; large room; light 
 ceiling; dark walls; lamps pendant; height from 8 to 15 feet .25 
 
 Same with very light walls 20 
 
 Tungsten lamps rated at 1.25 watts per horizontal candle-power; pris- 
 matic bowl reflectors enameled; large room; light ceiling; dark 
 
 walls; lamps pendant, height from 8 to 15 feet .29 
 
 Same with very light walls 23 
 
 Gem lamps rated at 2.5 watts per horizontal candle-power; clear pris- 
 matic reflectors either concentrating or bowl; large room; light 
 
 ceiling; dark walls; lamps pendant; height from 8 to 15 feet 55 
 
 Same with very light walls 45 
 
 Carbon filament lamps rated at 3.1 watts per horizontal candle-power; 
 clear prismatic reflectors either bowl or concentrating; light ceiling; 
 dark walls; large room; lamps pendant; height from 8 to 15 feet. . .65 
 
 Same with very light walls 55 
 
 Bare carbon filament lamps rated at 3.1 watts per horizontal candle- 
 power; no reflectors; large room; very light ceiling and walls; 
 
 height from 10 to 14 feet .75 to 1.5 
 
 Same; small room; medium walls 1 .25 to 2.0 
 
 Carbon filament lamps rated at 3.1 watts per horizontal candle-power; 
 opal dome or opal cone reflectors; light ceiling; dark walls; large 
 
 room; lamps pendant; height from 8 to 15 feet 70 
 
 Same with light walls 60 
 
 INTENSITY CONSTANTS FOR ARC LAMPS 
 
 5-ampere, enclosed, direct-current arc on 110-volt circuit; clear inner, 
 opal outer globe; no reflector; large room; light ceiling; medium 
 walls; height from 9 to 14 feet 50 
 
 Arrangement of Lamps. An arrangement of lamps giving a 
 uniform illumination cannot be well applied to residences on account 
 of the number of units required, and the inartistic effect. We are 
 
60 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 limited to chandeliers, side lights, or ceiling lights, in the majority 
 of cases, with table or reading lamps for special illumination. 
 
 When ceiling lamps are used and the ceilings are high, some 
 form of reflector or reflector lamp is to be recommended. In any 
 case where the coefficient of reflection of the 
 I ceilings is less than 40%, it is more economical 
 to use reflectors. When lamps are mounted 
 on chandeliers, the illumination is far from 
 uniform, being a maximum in the neighbor- 
 hood of the chandelier and a minimum at the 
 corners of the room. By combining chande- 
 liers with side lights it is generally possible to 
 I ro e ^ a satisfactory arrangement of lighting for 
 J small or medium-sized rooms. 
 <v| As a check on the candle-power in lamps 
 
 I . . require^ we have the following : 
 
 I *^ 
 
 * *' T For brilliant illumination allow one candle- 
 
 6'- 
 
 Fig. 53. Diagram Showing P ower P er two square feet of floor space. In some 
 Method of Calculating particular cases, such as ball rooms, this may be 
 Room Illumination. increased to one candle-power per square foot. 
 
 For general illumination allow one candle-power 
 
 for four square feet of floor space, and strengthen this illumination with the 
 aid of special lamps as required. The location of lamps and the height of 
 ceilings will modify these figures to some extent. 
 
 As an example of the calculation of the illu- y 
 mination of a room with different arrangements 
 of the units of light, assume a room 16 feet | 
 square, 12 feet high, and with walls having a S 
 coefficient of reflection of 50%. Consider first 
 the illumination on a plane 3 feet above the 
 floor when lighted by a single group of lights 
 mounted at the center of the room 3 feet below 
 the ceiling. If a minimum value of .5 foot- 
 candle is required at the corner of the room, 
 we have the equation (first method outlined) : 
 
 .5 = c. v. ^^ X 
 
 12.8 2 
 
 1 - .5 
 
 Since d =i/8 2 + 8 2 + 6 2 
 Fig. 53) 
 
 = 12.8 (see 
 
 f ^ m m s f r n Four 
 'side Vail. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 Solving the above for the value of c. p., we have 
 
 c. p. =- - ' 5 .5 X 82 == 41 
 
 ^ 
 
 .5 
 
 Three 16-candle-power lamps would serve this purpose very 
 well. 
 
 Determining the illumination directly under the lamp, we have: 
 
 I = 48 X ~ X - ^r- = |J X 2 = 
 6 2 1 - .5 36 
 
 2.7 foot-candles, or five times the value of the illumination at the 
 corners of the room. 
 
 Next consider four 8-candle-power lamps located on the side 
 walls 8 feet above the floor, as shown in Fig. 54. Calculating the 
 illumination at the center of the room on a plane three feet above 
 the floor, we have: 
 
 T 
 
 N 
 
 1 - . 
 
 89 89 89 89 1 - .5 
 ft = 8 2 + 5 2 = 64 + 25 - 89 
 
 I = 8 X -- X 2 = .72 foot-candles 
 
 Ot/ 
 
 The illumination at the corner of the room would be: 
 
 \ on on o A e o/ic ' 
 
 89 89 345 345 ' 1 - .5 
 ) X 2 = .45 foot-candles. 
 
 In a similar manner the illumination may be calculated for any 
 point in the room, or a series of points may be taken and curves plotted 
 showing the distribution of the light, as well as the areas having the 
 same illumination. Where refined calculations are desired, the dis- 
 tribution curve of the lamp must be used for determining the candle- 
 power in different directions. Fig. 55 shows illumination curves for 
 the Meridian lamp as manufactured by the General Electric Com- 
 pany. This is a form of reflector lamp made in two sizes, 25 or 50 
 candle-power. Fig. 56 gives the distribution curves for the 50- 
 candle-power unit. Similar incandescent lamps are now being 
 manufactured by other companies. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 Table XIV gives desirable data in connection with the u^ of 
 the Meridian lamp. 
 
 Fig. 55. Illumination Curves for a G. E. Meridian Lamp. 
 
 TABLE XIV 
 Illuminating Data for Meridian Lamps 
 
 
 
 No. 1 Lamp (60 Watts) No 2 Lamp(120 Watts) 
 
 
 Class Service 
 
 Light 
 Intensity 
 in Foot- 
 candles 
 
 Height of 
 Lamp and 
 Diameter 
 of Uni- 
 formly 
 Lighted 
 
 Distance 
 between 
 Lamps 
 when Two 
 or more 
 are Used 
 
 Height of 
 Lamp and 
 Diameter 
 of Uni- 
 formly 
 Lighted 
 
 Distance 
 between 
 Lamps 
 when Two 
 or more 
 are Used 
 
 per Sq. Ft. 
 of Area 
 Lighted 
 with 
 either 
 Lamp 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Desk or Reading 
 
 Tnhlp 
 
 3 
 2 
 
 2.9 feet 
 3.5 
 
 4 . 9 feet 
 6 
 
 4 feet 
 5 
 
 7 feet 
 
 8.5 ' 
 
 2.50 
 1.66 
 
 
 1? 
 
 4 
 
 7 " 
 
 5.75 ' 
 
 9.8 ' 
 
 1.25 
 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 8.5 " 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 0.83 
 
 General Lighting 
 
 1 
 
 5.75 
 
 9.8 " 
 
 8.2 ' 
 
 13.9 ' 
 
 0.62 
 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 0.41 
 
 By means of the Weber, or some other form of portable photom- 
 ete*, carves as plotted from calculations may be readily checked 
 after the lamps are installed. When lamps are to be permanently 
 located, the question of illumination becomes an important one, and 
 it may be desirable to determine, by calculation, the illumination 
 curves for each room before installing the lamps. This applies to 
 the lighting of large interiors more particularly than to residence 
 lighting. The point-by-point method of calculation is used for 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 63 
 
 very accurate work when the system of illumination admits of this 
 method. Other methods are often simpler and sufficiently accurate 
 for practical work. 
 
 no 
 
 30 20 10 10 20 30 
 
 Fig. 56. Distribution Curve for a G. E. 50-c. p. Meridian Lamp. 
 
 Dr. Louis Bell gives the following in connection with residence 
 
 lighting: 
 
 TABLE XV 
 
 Residence Lighting Data 
 
 ROOM 
 
 8 
 
 C. P. 
 
 16 
 
 C. P. 
 
 32 
 
 C.P. 
 
 SQ. FT. 
 
 PER C.P. 
 
 REMARKS 
 
 Hall, 15' X 20' 
 Library 20' X 20' 
 
 8 
 12 
 
 
 1 
 
 4.7 
 
 *5 1 
 
 8-c p reflector lamps 
 
 Reception room, 15' X 15' .. 
 Music room, 20' X 25' 
 Dining room, 15' X 20' 
 Billiard room, 15' X 20' 
 p orc h 
 
 4 
 12 
 14 
 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 1 
 
 7.0 
 3.0 
 2.7 
 2.3 
 
 8 reflector lamps 
 32-c.p.with reflectors 
 
 Bedrooms (6), 15' X 15' 
 Dressing rooms (2), 10' X 15'. 
 Servants' rooms (3), 10' X15' 
 Bathrooms (3), 8' X 10' 
 Kitchen, 15' X 15' ) 
 
 
 14 
 4 
 3 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 7.0 
 4.7 
 9.4 
 5.0 
 
 
 Pantry, 10' X 15' f ' 
 Halls ) 
 
 10 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 Cellar f 
 Closets (4) 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 Reflector lamps 
 
 Total 
 
 64 
 
 30 
 
 8 
 
 
 
^64 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 LIGHTING OF PUBLIC HALLS, OFFICES, ETC. 
 
 Lighting of public halls and other large interiors differs from the 
 illumination of residences in that there is usually less reflected light, 
 and, again, the distance of the light sources from the plane of illumi- 
 nation is generally greater if an artistic arrangement of the lights is 
 to be brought about. This in turn reduces the direct illumination. 
 The primary object is, however, as in residence lighting, to produce 
 a fairly uniform ground illumination and to superimpose a stronger 
 illumination where necessary. An illumination of .5 foot-candle for 
 the ground illumination may be taken as a minimum. 
 
 In the lighting of large rooms it is permissible to use larger light 
 units, such as arc lamps and high candle-power Nernst or incan- 
 descent units, while for factory lighting and drafting rooms, where 
 the color of the light is not so essential, the Cooper-Hewitt lamp is 
 being introduced. High candle-power reflector lamps, such as the 
 tungsten lamp, are being used to a large extent for offices and drafting 
 rooms. 
 
 The choice of the type of lamp depends on the nature of the 
 work. Where the light must be steady, incandescent or Nernst 
 lamps are to be preferred to the arc or vapor lamps, though the latter 
 are often the more efficient. When arcs are used, they must be care- 
 fully shaded so as to diffuse the light, doing away with the strong 
 shadows due to portions of the lamp mechanism, and to reduce the 
 intrinsic brightness. Such shading will be taken up under the head- 
 ing " Shades and Reflectors." Arcs are sometimes preferable to 
 incandescent lamps when colored objects are to be illuminated, as in 
 stores and display windows. 
 
 In locating lamps for this class of lighting, much depends on the 
 nature of the building and on the degree of economy to be observed. 
 For preliminary determination of the location of groups, or the illumi- 
 nation when certain arrangement of the units is assumed, the prin- 
 ciples outlined under "Residence Lighting" may be applied. It has 
 been found that actual measurements show results approximating 
 closely such calculated values. 
 
 When arcs are used they should be placed fairly high, twenty 
 to twenty-five feet when used for general illumination and the ceilings 
 are high. They should be supplied with reflectors so as to utilize 
 the light ordinarily thrown upwards. When used for drafting-room 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 65 
 
 work, they should be suspended from twelve to fifteen feet above 
 the floor, and special care must be taken to diffuse the light. 
 
 Incandescent lamps may be arranged in groups, either as side 
 lights or mounted on chandeliers, or they may be arranged as a frieze 
 running around the room a few feet below the ceiling. The last 
 named arrangement of lights is one that may be made artistic, but it 
 is uneconomical and when used should serve for the ground illumina- 
 tion only. Reflector lights may be used for this style of work and 
 the lights may be entirely concealed from view, the reflecting prop- 
 erty of the walls being utilized for distributing the light where needed. 
 
 Ceiling lights should preferably be supplied with reflectors, 
 especially when the ceilings are high. 
 
 Indirect lighting is employed to some extent. By indirect 
 lighting \ve mean a system af illumination in which the light sources 
 are concealed and the light from them is reflected to the room by the 
 walls, or ceilings, or other surfaces; or in which the light sources are 
 placed above a diffusing panel. In the latter case the diffusing plate 
 appears to be the source of light. In some cases the walls themselves 
 are shaped and constructed so as to form the reflectors for the light 
 units (cove lighting), but in others all of the reflecting surfaces, except 
 the side walls and ceiling, are made portions of the lamp fixtures. 
 
 Tables XVI and XVII give data on arc and mercury-vapor 
 lamps for lighting large rooms. Table XVII refers to arc lights as 
 aerially installed. 
 
 TABLE XVI 
 
 Cooper=Hewitt Lamps 
 
 SERVICE 
 
 HEIGHT OF LAMP 
 
 C. P. OF UNIT 
 
 Av. AREA PER LAMP 
 IN SQUARE FEET 
 
 Foundry 
 
 10-15 ft. 
 
 300 
 
 900 
 
 
 
 20-25 
 
 700 
 
 2250 
 
 Machine shop 
 
 10-15 
 
 300 
 
 500 
 
 Erecting shop 
 Drafting room 
 
 20-30 
 15 
 
 700 
 300 
 
 1250 
 300 
 
 (i 
 
 20 
 
 700 
 
 400 
 
 Offices 
 
 10-15 
 
 300 
 
 400 
 
 
 
 20-25 
 
 700 
 
 750 
 
 < Vdinary labor 
 
 10-15 
 
 300 
 
 1100 
 
 ' a 
 
 20-25 
 
 700 
 
 2750 
 
66 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 K a 
 pj 
 
 W 
 
 I: 
 
 8 
 
 00 CO 
 
 8 38 
 
 o* 
 
 11 
 
 P 
 
 o 10 
 
 -O<N ^H 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 ->1 
 
 Si 
 
 -3 d 
 03 ^ 
 
 JS 
 
 bJC 
 
 C 
 
 8 
 
 O01 CO 
 
 .-H ^HCOCO 
 
 3 . ^ 
 
 |^^ : 
 3 ^ : 
 
 <N 
 
 O CO 
 
 Q 
 
 fi : 
 
 ,o5 
 { H 1-1 
 
 S 
 
 OTH 
 
 TO 
 
 <N . O 
 
 a : 
 
 rt c3 
 
 : -8 : 
 
 a -a 
 
 :.* i 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 67 
 
 Measurements taken in well-lighted rooms having a floor space 
 of from 1,000 to 5,000 square feet show an average of 3 to 3.5 square 
 feet per candle-power. About 2.5 square feet per candle-power 
 should be allowed when brilliant lighting is required or the ceilings 
 are very high, while 3.75 square feet per candle-power will give good 
 illumination when lights are well distributed and there is considerable 
 reflected light. 
 
 In factory and drafting room lighting, the lamps must be arranged 
 to give a strong light where most needed, and located to prevent such 
 shadows as would interfere with the work. 
 
 STREET LIGHTING 
 
 In studying the lighting of streets and parks, we find that, except 
 in special cases, such as narrow streets and high buildings, there is 
 no reflected light which aids the illumination aside from that due to 
 special shades or reflectors on the lamp itself. Such reflectors are 
 necessary if the light ordinarily thrown above the horizontal plane is 
 to be utilized. 
 
 In calculating the illumination due to any type of lamp at a given 
 point it is necessary to know the distribution curve of the lamp used 
 and the distance to the point illuminated. The approximate illumi- 
 nation of a plane normal to the rays of light is given by the formula, 
 
 _ _ c.p. 
 
 h 2 + d 2 
 
 when I = illumination in foot-candles. 
 
 c.p. = candle-power of the unit, determined from the distri- 
 bution curve of the lamp. 
 
 h = distance the, lamp is mounted above the ground, in feet, 
 and d = distance from the base of 
 the pole supporting the lamp to the 
 point where the illumination is being 
 considered, Fig. 57. 
 
 While this will give the illumi- 
 nation in foot-candles, the nature of Fi &- 57 - street Li ^ ht illumination 
 
 Diagram. 
 
 the lighting cannot be decided from 
 
 this alone, but the total amount of light must also be considered. 
 
 Thus, a street lighted with powerful units and giving a minimum 
 
68 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 Fig. 58. 
 
 Ideal Distribution Curve for a Street 
 Light. 
 
 illumination of .05 foot-candles would be considered better illumi- 
 nated than one having smaller units so distributed as to give the 
 same minimum value. . \ 
 
 * \ A 
 
 Since a uniform distribu- 
 tion of light is desirable, for 
 economic reasons, the ideal 
 distribution curve of a lamp 
 for street lighting would be a 
 curve which shows a low value 
 of candle-power thrown di- 
 rectly downward, but with the 
 candle-power increasing as we 
 approach the horizon tal . Su ch 
 an ideal distribution curve is shown in Fig. 58. 
 
 Actual distribution curves taken from commercial arc lamps are 
 given in Fig. 59, in which 
 
 Curve A shows distribu- 
 tion curve for a 9.6-ampere, 
 gQ 50 40 30<s open, direct-current arc. 
 
 Curve B shows distribu- 
 tion curve for a 6.6-ampere, 
 D.C. enclosed arc 
 
 Curve C shows distribu- 
 tion curve for a 7.5-ampere, 
 A.C. enclosed arc. 
 
 Globes used with B and 
 C are opal inner globes, 
 clear outer globes. 
 
 Globes used with A are 
 clear outer globes. 
 
 A street reflector was 
 used with the enclosed arcs. 
 Typical curves for 
 flaming and luminous 
 arc lamps are shown in 
 Figs. 40, 43, and 44. 
 
 A series of curves 
 known as illumination 
 curves may be readily 
 calculated showing the 
 
 illumination in foot- 
 Distribution Curves for Commercial Arc ,, . ,. 
 Lamps Used in street Lighting. candles at given distance 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 1300 
 
 Fig. 59. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 69 
 
 from the foot of the pole supporting the lamp. Illumination curves 
 corresponding to the distribution curves in Fig. 59 are given in Fig. 60 
 where A', B f , andC" correspond to A, B, and C in Fig. 59. These 
 curves correspond to actual readings taken with commercial lamps. 
 Similar curves for incandescent lamps fitted with suitable reflectors 
 are shown in Fig. 61. A value o e .03 foot-candles is about the min- 
 
 Fig. 60. Illumination Curves Drawn to Data given in Fig. 59. 
 
 imum for street lighting. Open arcs should be placed at least 25 feet 
 above the ground; 30 to 40 feet is better, especially if the space to be 
 illuminated is quite open. With enclosed arcs it is often advan- 
 tageous to place them as low as 18 to 20 feet from the ground. 
 Table XVIII gives the distance between lights for different types 
 of arcs for fair illumination. 
 
 In considering the type of arc light to be used we must turn to 
 the illumination curves as shown in Fig. 60. These curves show that 
 the illumination from a direct-current open arc in its present form 
 is superior to that from a direct-current enclosed arc, taking the 
 
70 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 TABLE XVIII 
 
 
 DISTANCE 
 
 
 KIND OF LIGHT 
 
 BETWEEN 
 
 LIGHTS PEK 
 
 
 LIGHTS 
 
 MILE 
 
 6.6-ampere enclosed D.C. arc 
 
 340 feet 
 
 15 
 
 9.6-ampere open D.C. arc 
 6.6-ampere enclosed A C. arc 
 
 315 " 
 275 " 
 
 17 
 19 
 
 6.6-ampere open D.C arc 
 
 260 " 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 
 same amount of power, in the vicinity of the pole; but at a distance of 
 100 feet, the illumination from the enclosed arc is better. This 
 
 illumination is still more effective on 
 account of the absence of such strong 
 light as is given by the open arc near 
 the pole. The pupil of the eye adjusts 
 itself to correspond to the brightest 
 
 40' so- cor light in the field of vision, and we are 
 unable to see as well in the dimly- 
 
 Fig. 61. Illumination Curves for r , , -, , i ,1 
 
 street incandescent Lamps. lighted section as when the maximum 
 
 intensity is less. The characteristics 
 of the open and enclosed direct-current arc lamps are as follows: 
 
 The mean spherical candle-power and energy required at the arc are 
 variable with the open arc. 
 
 Fluctuations of light are marked, due to wandering of the arc, flickering 
 due to the wind and lack of uniformity of the carbons. 
 
 Dense shadows are cast by the side rods and the lower carbon, while the 
 light is objectionably strong in the vicinity of the pole. 
 
 With the enclosed arc the mean spherical candle-power and the watts 
 consumed at the arc are fairly constant. 
 
 No shadows are cast by the lamps, and the illumination is not subject to 
 such wide variations. The enclosed arc is much superior to the open arc using 
 the same amount of energy. This applies to the open arc as it is now used. 
 With proper reflection and diffusion of the light such as might be accomplished 
 by extensive or special shading, we ought to be able to get as good distribution 
 from the open arc with a greater total amount of illumination. 
 
 In comparing the direct-current with the alternating-current 
 enclosed arc, we see that the direct-current arc gives slightly more light 
 than the alternating lamp, but this may be more than counterbalanced 
 by the better distribution of light from the alternating-current lamp. 
 The selection of A.C. or D.C. enclosed lamps will usually depend on 
 other conditions, such as method of distribution of power, efficient 
 of plant, etc. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 71 
 
 TABLE XIX 
 Street- Lamp Data 
 
 
 
 APPROX. 
 
 APPROX. 
 
 LAMP 
 
 AMPERES 
 
 WATTS AT 
 LAMP 
 
 VALUE op 
 
 X AS 
 
 
 
 TERMINALS 
 
 PROPOSED 
 
 D. C. Series, open arc, clear globe 
 
 J6.6 
 {9.6 
 
 330 
 450 
 
 3.5 
 4 
 
 D, C. Series, enclosed, clear outer globe 
 
 J5.0 
 ]6.6 
 
 370 
 480 
 
 3.5 
 4 
 
 
 (5.5 
 
 345 
 
 3 
 
 Opalescent inner globe, street reflectors 
 
 J6.6 
 
 430 
 
 3.5 
 
 A. C. Series as above 
 
 (7.5 
 
 480 
 
 4 
 
 D. C. Series "Magnetite" 
 
 4.0 
 
 310 
 
 5.5 
 
 The question of street lighting has been given considerable 
 attention by the National Electric Light Association and this society 
 recommends the following form of specification for street lights: 
 
 1. Under ordinary conditions of street lighting, with lamps spaced 200 
 to 600 feet apart, specifications for street lamps should define the mean illumi- 
 nation thrown by the individual lamp, in position in the street, as measured at 
 the height of the observer's eye and perpendicular to the rays, at some point 
 not less than 200 feet nor more than 300 feet distant, along a level street, from 
 a position immediately below the lamp, with all extraneous light screened off 
 and with no reflection from surrounding objects not forming part of the lamp 
 equipment. 
 
 2. When using smaller units of light, such as series incandescent lamps 
 spaced shorter distances apart, a correspondingly shorter distance from the 
 lamp should be chosen in measuring the illumination. 
 
 3. The lamp contracted for should give a mean normal illumination at 
 the test point (selected as in Sections 1 and 2) not less than the illumination 
 given by the stationary standard incandescent lamp of 16 candle-power at 1/X 
 of the distance. The said standard incandescent lamp should be a stand- 
 ardized seasoned lamp having a determined candle-power in a fixed direction. 
 
 4. When the lamp tested fluctuates in intensity, a number of observa- 
 tions of the maximum normal illumination should be made at a distance of not 
 less than 200 feet horizontally from beneath the lamp, and the average of these 
 measurements should be taken as the average maximum illumination. A 
 similar number of observations of the minimum normal illumination should be 
 made, the average of which should be taken as the average minimum illumi- 
 nation. The arithmetical mean of the said average maximum and minimum 
 illuminations should be taken as the mean normal illumination called for in 
 Section 1. 
 
 5. A reasonable number of the lamps covered by the contract should 
 be tested. 
 
 6. For measuring the mean normal illumination of a lamp, comparison 
 with the standard incandescent lamp may be made either with a suitable portable 
 
72 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 photometer or with a reading distance instrument, such as the so-called lumi- 
 nometer. 
 
 7. The unobstructed mean normal illumination must not be less at 
 shorter distances than at the point of test. 
 
 8. An approximate value of the mean normal illuminations thrown by 
 street lamps of standard manufacture, at horizontal distances within the 200- 
 300-foot range, hung approximately 20 feet above the observer's eye, may be 
 determined from Table XIX. 
 
 Series incandescent lamps are used considerably for lighting 
 the streets in residence sections of cities or where shade trees make 
 it impracticable to use arcs. These vary in candle-power from 16 
 to 50 or even higher, and are usually constructed so as to take from 
 two to four amperes. The best arrangement of these is to mount 
 them on brackets a few feet from the curb, with alternate lamps on 
 opposite sides of the street. The distance between the lamps depends 
 on their power. 50 candle-power lamps spaced 100 feet between 
 lamps, give a minimum illumination of .02 foot-candle. 25 candle- 
 power lamps spaced 75 feet between lamps will serve where economy 
 is necessary. 
 
 TABLE XX 
 
 
 PER CENT 
 
 Clear glass 
 
 10 
 
 Alabaster glass 
 
 15 
 
 Opaline glass 
 
 20-40 
 
 
 25-30 
 
 Opal glass 
 
 25-60 
 
 Milkv glass 
 
 30-60 
 
 Ground glass 
 
 24 4 
 
 Opal glass 
 
 32 2 
 
 Opaline glass ... 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 SHADES AND REFLECTORS 
 
 Lamps, as ordinarily constructed, do not always give a suitable 
 distribution of light, while the intrinsic brightness is often too high 
 for interior lighting. Shades are intended to modify the intensity 
 of the light, while reflectors are used for the purpose of changing its 
 direction. Frequently the two are combined in various ways. Shades 
 are also used for decorative purposes, but, if possible, these should 
 be of such a nature as to aid illumination rather than to reduce its 
 efficiency. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 73 
 
 A considerable amount of light is absorbed by the material used 
 for the construction of shades. Table XX shows the approximate 
 amount absorbed by some materials. 
 
 Of the great number of styles of shades 
 and reflectors in use, only a few of the more 
 important will be considered here. 
 
 Frosted Globes. One of the simplest 
 methods of shading incandescent lamps is by 
 the use of frosted bulbs. These serve to 
 reduce the intrinsic brightness of the lamp, and 
 should be freely used for residence lighting 
 when separate shades are not installed. Frosted 
 globes are also used in connection with reflec- 
 tors for the purpose of diffusing the reflected 
 light. The McCreary shade as shown in Fig. 
 62, is an example of such a combined shade 
 and reflector. Fig. 63 shows the distribution Fig 62 Mc creary Shade, 
 curve taken from an incandescent lamp using 
 
 a McCreary shade. Fig. 64 shows the distribution of light from a con- 
 ical shade. Fig. 56 shows the distribution of light brought about by 
 means of a spiral filament and a reflector as used in the Meridian lamp. 
 
 4-C5 C.P. 
 
 Fig. 63. Distribution Curve for Incan- 
 descent Lamp Provided with 
 McCreary Shade. 
 
 Fig. 64. Distribution Curve for Incan- 
 descent Lamp Provided with 
 Conical Shade. 
 
74 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 Holophane Globes. These are made for both reflecting and 
 diffusing the light, and they can be made to bring about almost any 
 desired distribution with but a small amount of absorption of light. 
 These consist of shades of clear glass having horizontal grooves 
 forming surfaces which change the direction of light by refraction or 
 total reflection as is necessary. The diffusion of light is effected by 
 means of deep, rounded, vertical grooves on the interior surface of 
 the globe. While these globes are of clear glass and absorb an amount 
 of light corresponding to clear glass, the light is so well diffused that 
 the filament of the lamp cannot be seen, and the globe appears as if 
 
 Fig. 65. Enclosed Arc Lamp Fitted with Shade and Concentric Diffuser. 
 
 made of some semi-transparent material. The holophane glassware 
 is made in a large variety of artistic designs and for all types of in- 
 candescent lamps. By the proper selection of a reflector the dis- 
 tribution of the light of the unit used may be made that which is best 
 suited to the particular case of lighting in hand. Figs. 9, 13, 14, 
 15, 16, 17, and 18 give some idea of what can be accomplished by these 
 shades. 
 
 Fig. 65 shows an enclosed arc lamp fitted with a shade and a 
 concentric diffuser. The effect of this combination is best shown 
 in Fig. 66. Fig. 67 shows the change in the illumination curve pro- 
 .duced by such shading. Inverted arcs have some application where 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 75 
 
 Fig. 66. Diagram Showing Effect of the Concentric Diffuser. 
 
 the light may be readily reflected and diffused as in lighting large 
 rooms with light finish. Reflectors of this general type are now being 
 manufactured in such a form that they may be built in and become 
 part of the ceiling of the room to be illuminated. 
 
 LAMPS WITH OPAL GLASS SHADES. 
 
 LAMPS WITH CONCENTRIC LIGHT DIFFUSERS. 
 
 Fig. 67. Illumination Curves for Lamps \rithand without Light Diffusers. 
 
76 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 Opal Enclosing Globes. The use of opal enclosing globes is 
 recommended for arc lamps used for street lighting for the reason 
 that they change the distribution of the light so that it covers a greater 
 area, and the light is so diffused as to obliterate shadows in the vicinity 
 of the lamp. Table XXI gives the efficiency of different globe com- 
 binations for street lighting assuming the opal inner and the clear 
 outer globes as 100%. 
 
 TABLE XXI 
 
 O pal enclosing and clear outer 
 
 Clear " " clear " . 
 
 " opal " . 
 
 Opal " " opal " . 
 
 100 per cent 
 91.2 
 85.1 
 
 82.7 
 
 PHOTOMETRY 
 
 Photometry is the art of comparing the illuminating properties 
 of light sources, and forms one branch of scientific measurement. 
 Its use in electric illumination is to determine the relative values of 
 different types of lamps as sources of illumination, together with their 
 efficiency; also by means of the principles of photometry, we are able 
 to study the distribution of illumination for any given arrangement 
 of light sources. 
 
 LIGHT STANDARDS 
 
 Inasmuch as sources of light are compared with one another in 
 photometry, we must have some standard, or unit, to which all light 
 sources are reduced. This unit is usually the candle-power and the 
 rating of most lamps is given in candle-power. 
 
 While the candle-power remains the unit and is based on the 
 standard English candle, other light standards have been introduced 
 and are much more desirable. 
 
 The English Candle. The English candle is made of spermaceti 
 extracted from crude sperm oil, with the addition of a small quantity 
 of beeswax to reduce the brittleness. Its length is ten inches, and its 
 diameter .9 inch at the bottom and .8 inch at the top, and its weight 
 is one-sixth of a pound. Great care is taken in the preparation of 
 the wick and spermaceti. This candle burns with a normal height 
 of flame of 45 millimeters and consumes 120 grains per hour when 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 77 
 
 burning in dry air at normal atmospheric pressure. Under these 
 conditions, the light given by a single candle is one candle-power. 
 
 When used for measurements, the candle should be allowed to 
 burn at least fifteen minutes before taking any readings. At the end 
 of this period the wick should be trimmed, if necessary, and when the 
 flame height reaches 45 millimeters, readings can be taken. The 
 candle should not require trimming when the proper height of flame 
 has been reached. It is best to weigh the amount of material con- 
 sumed by balancing the candle on a properly arranged balance when 
 the first reading is taken, and again balancing at the end of a suitable 
 period ten to fifteen minutes. The candle-power of the unit is 
 then, practically, directly proportional to the amount of the material 
 consumed. 
 
 The objections to the candle as a unit are that it burns with an 
 open flame which is subject to variation in height and to the effect of 
 air currents. The color of the light is not satisfactory, being too 
 rich in the red rays, and the composition of the spermaceti is more or 
 less uncertain. 
 
 The German Candle is made of very pure paraffine, burns 
 with a normal flame height of 50 millimeters, and is subject to the 
 same disadvantages as the English candle. It may be necessary to 
 trim the wick to keep the flame height at 50 millimeters. The light 
 given is a trifle greater than for the spermaceti candle. 
 
 The Carcel Lamp is built according to very careful specifications 
 and burns colza (rape seed) oil. It has been used to a large extent 
 in France, but its present application is limited. 
 
 The Pentane Lamp is a specially constructed lamp burning 
 pentane, prepared by the distillation of gasoline between narrow 
 limits of temperature. This standard is not extensively used. 
 
 The Amyl Acetate Lamp. This lamp, known also as the Hefner 
 lamp, is at present the most desirable standard. It is a lamp built 
 to very careful specifications, especially with regard to the dimension 
 of the wick tube. It burns pure amyl acetate and the flame height 
 should be 40 millimeters. This flame height must be very carefully 
 adjusted by means of gauges furnished with the lamp. Amyl acetate 
 is a colorless hydrocarbon prepared from the distillation of amyl 
 alcohol obtained from fusel oil, with a mixture of acetic and sulphuric 
 acids, or by distillation of a mixture of amyl acetate, sulphuric acid, 
 
78 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 and potassium acetate. It has a definite composition, and must be 
 pure for this use. 
 
 The most serious disadvantage of this standard is the color of 
 the light, inasmuch as it has a decidedly red tinge and is not readily 
 compared with whiter lights. Its value is affected somewhat by the 
 moisture in the air and the atmospheric pressure, but it excels all other 
 standards in that it is quite readily reproduced. 
 
 Table XXII gives the value of the candle-power units of different 
 laboratories in terms of the unit of the Bureau of Standards and also 
 the values of the units of the Carcel and Vernon-Harcourt in terms of 
 the Hefner, as accepted by the International Photometric Commission. 
 
 TABLE XXII 
 Photometric Units 
 
 Bureau of Standards Unit, United" States 
 
 1.000 
 
 
 Reichsanstalt Unit, Germany 
 
 0.998 
 
 X 0.88 
 
 National Physical Laboratory Unit, England 
 
 0.984 
 
 
 Laboratoire Central Unit, France 
 
 0.982 
 
 
 
 CARCEL 
 
 HEFNER 
 
 VERNON- 
 HARCOURT 
 
 Carcel 
 Hefner 
 Vernon-Harcourt (pentane) 
 
 1.00 
 0.0930 
 1.020 
 
 10.75 
 1.00 
 10.95 
 
 0.980 
 0.0915 
 1.0 
 
 The above values are at a barometric pressure of 760 mm. of mercury and a humid- 
 ity for the Carcel and Vernon-Harcourt standards of 10.0 liters of water per cubic meter 
 of dry air. The humidity for the hefner unit is 8.8 liters of water to one cubic meter 
 of dry air. 
 
 Working Standards. Incandescent Lamp. The units just de- 
 scribed, together with some others, form reference standards, but an 
 incandescent lamp is generally used as the working standard in all 
 photometers. An incandescent lamp, when used for this work, should 
 be burned for about two hundred hours, or until it has reached the 
 point in the life curve where its value is constant, and it should then 
 be checked by means of some standard when in a given position and 
 at a fixed voltage. It then serves as an admirable working standard 
 if the applied voltage is carefully regulated. Two such lamps should 
 always be used the one to serve as a check on the other; the checking 
 lamp to be used for very short intervals only. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 79 
 
 PHOTOMETERS 
 
 Two light sources are compared by means of a photometer 
 which; in one of its simplest forms, consists of what is known as a 
 Bunsen screen mounted on a carriage between the two lights being 
 compared, with its plane at right angles to a line passing through 
 the light sources, and arranged with mirrors or prisms so that both 
 sides of the screen may be observed at once. The Bunsen screen 
 consists of a disk of paper with a portion of either the center, or a 
 section around the center, treated with paraffine so as to render it 
 translucent. If the light falling on one side of this screen is in ex- 
 cess, the translucent spot will appear dark on that side of the screen 
 and light on the opposite side. 
 Care must be taken to see that 
 the two sides of the screen are 
 exactly alike, otherwise there will 
 be an error introduced in using 
 the screens. It is well to reverse 
 the screen and check readings 
 whenever a new lot of lamps are 
 to be tested. When the light 
 falling on the two sides of the 
 screen is the same, the trans- 
 parent spot disappears. The 
 values of the two light sources are 
 then directly proportional to the 
 square of their distances from the 
 screen. As an example, consider a 16 candle-power lamp being 
 compared with a standard candle on a photometer with a 300-centi- 
 meter bar. Say the translucent spot disappears when the screen 
 is distant 60 centimeters from the standard candle, we then have 
 the proportion, 
 
 x : 1 - (240) 2 : (60) 2 == 16 : 1, 
 
 showing that the lamp gives 16 candle-power. 
 
 The above law is known as the law of inverse squares, and holds 
 true only when the dimensions of the light sources are small com- 
 pared with the distance between them, and when there are no reflecting 
 surfaces present as when the readings are taken in a dark room. 
 
 Fig. 68. Proof of the Law of Inverse 
 Squares by the Method of Con- 
 centric Spheres. 
 
80 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 The proof that the light varies inversely with the square of dis- 
 tance from the source is as follows: 
 
 Consider two spherical surfaces, Fig. 68, illuminated by a source 
 of light at the center. The same quantity of light falls on both sur- 
 faces. 
 
 Area of 8 = lirR 2 sq. ft. (R is in feet.) 
 Area of $ x = 4 r n-R 2 1 sq. ft. 
 
 Let Q = total quantity of light and q = light falling on unit 
 surface. Then, 
 
 Q 
 
 Q 
 
 Q 
 
 Q 
 
 Fig. 69 shows the relation in another way. The area of C. dis- 
 tant two units from the 
 source of light A, is four 
 times that of B which is 
 distant one unit. 
 
 The Lummer=Brodhun 
 Photometer. In addition 
 to the Bunsen screen de- 
 scribed, there are several 
 other forms of photom- 
 eters, the most important 
 
 Fig. 69. Proof of the Law of Inverse Sqiiares by , . , . T 
 
 Method of Screen Shadow. of wnicn is the Lummer- 
 
 Brodhun. The essential 
 
 feature of this instrument is the optical train which serves to bring 
 into contrast the portions of the screen illuminated by the two sources 
 of light. Referring to Fig. 70 the screen S is an opaque screen which 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 81 
 
 reflects the light falling upon it from Z, to the mirror M, when it is 
 again reflected to the pair of glass prisms A, B. The surfaces sr are 
 ground to fit perfectly and any light falling on this surface will pass 
 through the prisms. Light falling on the surface ar or bs will be re- 
 flected as shown by the arrows. We see then that the light from L, 
 which falls on ar and bs, is reflected to the eye piece or telescope T, 
 while that falling on sr is transmitted to and absorbed by the black 
 interior of the containing box. Likewise, the light from the screen 
 
 Fig. 70. Diagram of Lummer-Brodhun Screen. 
 
 L 1 is reflected by the screen M^ to the pair of prisms A, B. The 
 rays falling on the surface sr pass through to the telescope T, while 
 the rays falling on ar and bs are reflected and absorbed by the black 
 lining of the case. The field of light, as then viewed through the 
 telescope, appears as a disk of light produced by the screen L v sur- 
 rounded by an annular ring of light produced by L. When the 
 illumination on the two sides of the screen is the same, the disk and 
 ring appear alike and the dividing circle disappears. 
 
 In using this screen, it is mounted the same as the Bunsen screen 
 and readings are taken in the same manner. The screen and prisms 
 are arranged so that they can be reversed readily and two readings 
 
82 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 should always be taken to compensate for any inequalities in the sides 
 of the screen and the reflecting surfaces, a mean of the two readings 
 
 Fig. 71. Complete Photometer with Liunmer-Broclhun Screen. 
 
 serving as the true reading. This form of screen is used when es- 
 pecially accurate comparisons are required. 
 
 Fig. 71 shows a complete photometer with a Lummer-Brodhun 
 screen, while Fig. 72 shows a Bunsen screen and sight box. In Fig. 
 71, the lamps are shaded by means of curtains so as to leave only a 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 83 
 
 smtill opening toward the screen. If the lights are properly screened 
 photometric measurements may be made in rooms having light- 
 colored walls. 
 
 Fig. 72. Bunsen Screen and Sight Box. 
 
 The Weber Photometer. As an example of a portable type of 
 photometer, we have the Weber. This photometer, shown in Fig. 73, 
 is very compact and is especially adapted to measuring intensity of 
 illumination as well as 
 the value of light sources ; 
 it may be used for ex- 
 ploring- the illumination 
 of rooms or the lighting 
 of streets. 
 
 This apparatus con- 
 sists of a tube A, Fig. 74, 
 which is mounted hori- 
 zontally and contains a 
 circular, opal glass plate 
 /, which is movable by 
 means of a rack and 
 pinion. To this screen is 
 attached an index finger 
 which moves over a scale 
 attached to the outside of 
 the tube. A lamp L, 
 
 burning benzine, is mounted at the end of this tube. The benzine 
 used should be as pure as possible, and the flame height should be 
 
 Fig. 73. Weber Portable Photometer. 
 
84 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 carefully adjusted to 20 mm. when taking readings. At right angles 
 to the tube A is mounted the tube B which contains an eye piece at 
 0, a Lummer-Brodhun contrast prism at p, and a support for opal or 
 colored glass plates at g. 
 
 Operation. The tube B is turned toward the source of light to 
 be measured, the distance from the light to the screen at g being noted. 
 The light from this source is diffused by the screen at g, while that 
 from the standard is diffused by the screen /. By moving (he screen 
 /, the light falling on either side of the prism p can be equalized. 
 The value of the unknown source can be determined from the reading 
 of the screen /, the photometer having previously been calibrated by 
 
 means of a standard lamp 
 in place of the one to be 
 measured. The calibra- 
 tion may be plotted in the 
 form of a curve or it may be 
 denoted by a constant C, 
 when we have the formula, 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 r = c ~ 
 
 C corresponds to a par- 
 ticular plate at g, I = dis- 
 tance of screen / from the 
 benzine lamp, and L = dis- 
 tance from the screen g to 
 the light source being 
 measured. Screens of dif- 
 ferent densities may be 
 used at g, depending on 
 the strength of the light source. 
 
 When used for measuring illumination, a white screen is used 
 in connection with this photometer. The screen is mounted in front 
 of the opening at g } and turned so that it is illuminated by the source 
 being considered. Readings of the screen / are taken as before. A 
 calibration curve is plotted for the instrument, using a known light 
 source at a known distance from the white screen when the instru- 
 ment is mounted in a dark room. 
 
 Fig. 74. Diagram of Weber Photometer. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 85 
 
 Portable Photometers, There is a large variety of portable 
 photometers available and giving more or less satisfactory results. 
 An instrument especially designed with a view to portability and to 
 overcoming some of the 
 defects of instruments 
 already on the market 
 has recently been intro- 
 duced. The instrument 
 referred to is called a 
 Universal photometer but 
 it is more commonly 
 known as the Sharp- 
 Millar photometer from the names of its inventors. Views of this 
 instrument are shown in Figs. 75 and 76. It is adapted to the meas- 
 urement of the intensity of light sources as well as to the illumination 
 at any point, as is the Weber photometer. The photometer screen 
 or photometric device is shown at B, and consists of a special form of 
 
 Fig. 75. Universal Photometer. 
 
 Fig. 76. Sectional View of Universal Photometer. 
 
 Lummer-Brodhun optical screen. A standardized incandescent 
 lamp C is used as the photometric standard and this may be con- 
 nected to a battery, or be adapted to use on the mains supplying the 
 lamps in the room where measurements are to be taken. All stray 
 light is carefully screened from the interior of the box by a series of 
 screens G. The instrument scale is calibrated in foot-candles and in 
 candle-powers. 
 
86 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 When illumination is to be measured, a specially selected trans- 
 luscent screen is placed at A and the illumination of this plate, which 
 is placed at the point and in the plane where the value of the illumi- 
 nation is desired, is reflected to the photometric device by the mirror 
 at H. A second plate K is mounted so as to be illuminated by the 
 standard lamp and the photometer is balanced by making the illumi- 
 nation of A and K the same. When the intensity of a light source 
 is to be determined, the screen at A is replaced by a small aperture 
 and a diffusing surface I is put in place of the mirror H. The illumi- 
 nation of 7 is now compared with the illumination of K, and when 
 the two are made equal, the photometer reads the candle-power of the 
 light source, or some multiple of this candle-power. The range of 
 this instrument is increased by the use of suitably arranged absorbing 
 screens which may be readily inserted or removed, and as ordinarily 
 equipped, the range in foot-candles is approximately from .004 to 
 2,000. The variety of uses which can be made of such a photometer 
 is large, and some idea of its portability can be obtained from the 
 dimensions of the box, 24" x 4J" x 5", and its weight, fully equipped, 
 of 8 pounds. It is very accurate considering its compactness. 
 
 Integrating Photometers. Matthews. This photometer is used 
 to some extent and a very good idea of its construction can be ob- 
 tained from Fig. 77. By means of a system of mirrors, the light 
 given by the lamp in several directions may be integrated and throw r n 
 on the photometer screen for comparison with the standard, the result 
 giving the mean spherical candle-power from one reading. By cover- 
 ing all but one pair of screens, the light given in any one direction 
 is easily determined. 
 
 Another type of integrating photometer is known as the inte- 
 grating sphere or globe photometer. If a light source is placed within 
 a sphere, the interior walls of which are coated with a white diffusing 
 surface, the illumination of that surface at any point is due partly 
 to the light falling on it directly, and partly to the light reflected from 
 the remainder of the surface of the sphere. The reflected light is 
 proportional to the total flux of light from the light source and so, 
 if the direct light is screened from the point considered, its illumina- 
 tion is proportional to the total flux of light, and hence to the mean 
 spherical candle-power of the light source. 
 
 The practical application of this principle is to so arrange our 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 87 
 
 properly coated sphere that the lamp to be tested may be readily 
 inserted; to replace a small portion of the sphere by a piece of un- 
 polished white glass; to shut off the direct rays of the lamp to be 
 
 Fig. 77. Integrating Photometer. 
 
 measured from this glass surface; and to so mount a photometer 
 screen and standard lamp that the illumination of the glass section 
 can be measured. Under these conditions the illumination of the 
 glass screen is proportional to the mean spherical candle-power of the 
 lamp under test. A substitution method is used in practice. A 
 
88 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 standardized lamp of the general type of the one to be tested is mounted 
 in the sphere and the constant of the instrument for this type of lamp 
 is determined. The unknown lamps are then put in place and their 
 candle-power is readily determined, once the constant of the instru- 
 ment is known. Figs. 78 and 79 give some views of the integrating 
 
 Fig. 78. Eighteen -Inch Integrating Sphere Equipped with Photometer. 
 
 sphere and indicate the range of the sizes in which it may be con- 
 structed. 
 
 INCANDESCENT LAMP PHOTOMETRY 
 
 Apparatus. Some sort of screen, either the Bunsen type or the 
 Lummer-Brodhun screen preferred, should be mounted on a carriage 
 moving on a suitable scale, and the lamp holders, one for the standard, 
 the other for the lamp to be tested, are mounted at the ends of this 
 scale. There are several types of so-called station photometers 
 arranged so as to be very convenient for testing incandescent lamps. 
 Fig. 80 shows one form of station photometer manufactured by 
 Queen & Co. The controlling rheostats and shielding curtains are 
 not shown here. Fig. 81 shows a form of portable photometer for 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 89 
 
 incandescent lamps. The length of scale should not be less than 
 100 centimeters, and 150 to 200 centimeters is preferred. This scale 
 may be divided into centimeters or, for the purpose of doing away 
 with much of the calculation, the scale may be a proportional scale. 
 This scale is based on the law of inverse squares and reads the inverse 
 ratio of the squares of the distances from the two lights being compared. 
 
 Fig. 79. Interior of 80-Inch Integrating Sphere. 
 
 If the standard used always has the same value, the scale may be 
 made to read in candle-powers directly. 
 
 For mean horizontal candle-power measurements, the lamp 
 should be rotated at 180 revolutions per minute, when mounted in a 
 vertical position. 
 
 For distribution curves a universal lamp holder which will 
 allow the lamp to be placed in any position, and which indicates this 
 position, is used. 
 
 ^or mean spherical candle-power, the following method is used 
 when the Matthews photometer is not available : 
 
90 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 The lamp is placed in an adjustable holder and readings taken 
 with the lamp in thirty-eight positions, as follows : 
 
 The measurement of the spherical intensity. For convenience 
 the tip of the lamp and its base may be termed the north and south 
 poles respectively. 
 
 Fig. 80. Station Photometer. 
 
 The mean of 13 readings taken at intervals of 30,. is taken to give the 
 mean horizontal candle-power. 
 
 Beginning again at azimuth, thirteen readings are made in the prime 
 meridian or vertical circle, the interval again being 30, and the last reading 
 checking the first. 
 
 Fig. 81. Portable Photometer for Incandescent Lamps. 
 
 It will be noticed that four readings, two being check readings, have been 
 made at azimuth in each case. The mean of the four is taken as the standard 
 reading, it being the value of the intensity, in this position, should the lamp be 
 used as a standard. 
 
 Additional sets of thirteen readings each the last reading checking the 
 first one are similarly made on each of the vertical circles through 45, 90, 
 and 135 azimuth. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 91 
 
 In combining the readings for the mean spherical intensity, a note is 
 taken of the repetitions. 
 
 Neglecting the repetitions, which may also be omitted in part, in the 
 practice of the method, there remain thirty-eight points, as follows: 
 
 DISTRIBUTED 
 VALUES 
 
 The mean of four measurements at the north pole of the lamp 1 
 
 Four measurements on each of the vertical circles through and 90 
 
 azimuth at vertical circle readings of 60, 120, 240, and 300... . 8 
 Four measurements on each of the vertical circles through 0, 45, 90, 
 
 and 135 azimuth at vertical circle readings of 30, 150, 210, and 
 
 330 16 
 
 Twelve measurements 30 apart at the equator 12 
 
 Four null values at the south pole of lamp 1 
 
 Total number of effective measurements 38 
 
 The points thus laid off on the reference sphere are approximately equi- 
 distant, being somewhat closer together at the equator than at the poles. 
 
 When the lamp is rotated, readings are taken for each 15 or 30 
 in inclination, from to 90, and from to 270. These are inte- 
 grated values for their corresponding parallels of latitude on the unit 
 sphere. 
 
 The mean spherical candle-power from these readings may best 
 be obtained by plotting a distribution curve from the readings, deter- 
 mining the area of this closed curve by means of a planimeter and 
 taking the radius of an equivalent circle as the value for the mean 
 spherical candle-power. 
 
 The Rousseau diagram may be used for determining the mean 
 spherical candle-power of a lamp when its vertical distribution curve 
 is known. Fig. 82 shows such a diagram made up for a gem lamp 
 with a bowl reflector. Where the horizontal distribution curve of the 
 lamp is net uniform the values for the vertical distribution curve 
 should be taken with the lamp rotating so as to give average values 
 at each angle. One-half of the distribution curve is drawn to scale A 
 and a circle B is drawn with the source of light as a center. Radii 
 C are drawn at equal angles about the light source and extended until 
 they intersect the circle B. The points of intersection of these lines 
 with the circle are projected upon the straight line D E. Distances 
 from this line are laid off on the verticals F equal to the distances 
 from the center of the circle to the points where the corresponding 
 radii cut the distribution curve. The area enclosed between the 
 straight line D E and a curve drawn through the points just deter- 
 mined, G H, divided by the base line, is equal to the mean spherical 
 
92 
 
 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 candle-power of the lamp. If the mean candle-power ot the lamp 
 within a certain angle is desired, it is only necessary to find the area 
 of the diagram within the space indicated by that angle and divide 
 by the corresponding base. 
 
 , Vertical o 
 
 ^-- r -^^^ : -- :r -y- -y 
 1 -\ - / ~ >-"^^ \/ / 'i * \V/* x v r "--..' ; 
 
 W |^7^>?^^^VN>x"/^ 
 
 -V^ 
 
 n I 
 'I I 
 ' I 
 n i 
 li 
 
 / - ' Jr~* \ 
 
 ;;! i 
 
 \ X 
 
 C 
 
 /^ 
 
 80 
 
 6 
 
 60 
 
 40 
 
 20 
 
 K'- 
 
 O/O a 2030 ?5^ 60 75 90 /OS J3O /35 /50/65/aO a 
 
 Fig. 82. Rousseau Diagram for Gem Lamp with Bowl Reflector. 
 
 In all tests the voltage of the lamp must be very closely regulated. 
 A storage battery forms the ideal source of current for such purposes. 
 In testing incandescent lamps, a standard similar to the lamp being 
 tested is desirable and it should, preferably, be connected to the same 
 leads. Any variation in the voltage of the mains then affects both 
 lamps and the error introduced is slight. 
 
ELECTRIC LIGHTING 03 
 
 ARC LIGHT PHOTOMETRY 
 
 Owing to the variation of the amount of light given out by an 
 arc lamp in one direction at any time, due to variation of the qualities 
 of the carbons, position of the arc, and also on account of the color 
 of the light, etc., the photometry of arc lamps is much more difficult 
 than that of incandescent lamps. The curves shown in Figs. 33 and 
 34 are average distribution curves taken from several lamps and will 
 vary considerably for any one lamp. If the arc is enclosed, this 
 variation is not so great. 
 
 The working standard should be an incandescent lamp run at 
 a voltage above the normal so that the quality of the light will com- 
 pare favorably with that of the arc. Since an incandescent lamp 
 deteriorates rapidly when run at over voltage, the standard can be 
 used only for short intervals and must be frequently checked. 
 
 Since an arc lamp can be mounted in one position only, mirrrors 
 must be used to obtain distribution curves. A mirror is used mounted 
 at 45 with the axis of the photometer, and arranged so as to reflect 
 the arc when in different positions. A mirror absorbs a certain per 
 cent of the light falling upon it and this percentage must be deter- 
 mined by using lamps previously standardized. The length of the 
 photometer bar must include the distance from the mirror to the arc. 
 
 The Weber photometer is well adapted to arc-light measure- 
 ments inasmuch as appropriate screens may be used to cut down 
 the intensity of the light. 
 
 A special form of the Matthews photometer is also used for 
 testing arc lamps. 
 
 For the comparison of the illumination from arc lamps as in- 
 stalled in service, an instrument known as an illuminometer is some- 
 times used. This consists of a light wooden box, readily portable, 
 having a black interior and arranged with two openings. One 
 of these openings is for the purpose of admitting light from the source 
 being considered, to a printed card. The other opening is for the 
 purpose of viewing this card when illuminated by the light source. 
 The printing on the card is made up from type of different sizes, and 
 the smallest size which is legible, together with the distance from the 
 light source, is noted. Another method of application is to select 
 some definite size of type and then to move the instrument from the 
 
94 ELECTRIC LIGHTING 
 
 light source to a point where this type is just legible and note the dis- 
 tance. From similar measurements taken on different lamps a good 
 comparison may be obtained. Such an instrument is very convenient 
 to use, and results obtained by different observers check very closely. 
 
 The flicker photometer is used for the comparison of different 
 colored lights, the basis for comparison being that each light, though 
 different in color, shall produce light sensations equally intense for the 
 purpose of distinguishing outlines. It consists, in one form, of an 
 arrangement by means of which a sectored disk is rotated in front of 
 each light source, these disks being so arranged that the light from 
 one source is cut off while the other falls on the screen, and vice versa, 
 any form of screen being used for making the comparison. The disks 
 must be revolved at such a rate that the light, viewed from the oppo- 
 site side, will appear continuous. When the illumination of the two 
 sides of the screen, under these conditions, is not the same, there will 
 be a perceptible flicker and the screen should be so adjusted that this 
 flicker disappears. The value of the light source can then be calcu- 
 lated from the screen reading in the usual manner. Another device 
 consists of the use of a special lens mounted in front of a wedge- 
 shaped screen, the lens being constructed so as to reverse the image 
 of the two sides of the screen, as viewed by the eye, when such lens 
 is in front of the screen. The lens is so mounted that it can be oscil- 
 lated rapidly in front of the screen, giving the same result as would be 
 obtained were it possible to reverse the screen at such a rapid rate as 
 to cause the illumination on the two sides to appear continuous. The 
 setting of this screen is accomplished as with the more simple forms. 
 
 Still another flicker photometer, the Simmance-Abady, makes 
 use of a rotating wheel. This wheel is made of a white material 
 having a diffusing surface, and its edge is so beveled that during part 
 of a revolution a surface illuminated by one of the light sources is 
 viewed through the eye-piece of the instrument, and during the other 
 part of the revolution a surface viewed by the second light source is 
 observed. The flicker occasioned by this change disappears when 
 the screen is brought to a point where it is equally illuminated by the 
 two light sources. 
 
 By the use of such forms of photometers it is found that results 
 with different colored lights can be obtained, which are comparable 
 with results obtained with lights of the same color. 
 
INDEX 
 
 PART PAGE 
 
 Alternating-current circuits I ? 40 
 
 calculation of I, 44 
 
 line capacity I, 43 
 
 mutual induction I, 42 
 
 skin effect I, 42 
 
 Alternating-current lines, drop in I, 44 
 
 Amyl acetate lamp II, 17 
 
 Arc lamps II, 32 
 
 carbons for II, 41 
 
 efficiency II, 41 
 
 electric arc II, 32 
 
 flaming arc II, 42 
 
 Bremer II, 42 
 
 magnetite II, 44 
 
 mechanisms II, 33 
 
 carbon-feed II, 37 
 
 rod-feed II, 37 
 
 series II, 35 
 
 shunt . , II, 35 
 
 rating of II, 40 
 
 types of II, 38 
 
 alternating-current II, 39 
 
 direct-current II, 38 
 
 interchangeable II, 40 
 
 Arc light photometry II, 93 
 
 B 
 
 Bremer arc lamp II, 42 
 
 Bushings I, 65 
 
 C 
 
 Carbon incandescent lamps, manufacture of II, 3 
 
 Carcel lamp II, 77 
 
 Concealed knob and tube wiring I, 13 
 
 Conductors, calculation of sizes of I, 25 
 
 Cross-arms : I, 75 
 
 Cut-out panels I, 66 
 
 i 
 
ii INDEX 
 
 E 
 
 PART PAGE 
 
 Electric lighting II, 1.94 
 
 arc lamps II, 32 
 
 arc light photometry II, 93 
 
 classification II, 2 
 
 history and development II, 1 
 
 illumination II, 53 
 
 incandescent lamp photometry .'. II, 88* 
 
 incandescent lamps II, 2 
 
 light standards II, 76 
 
 lighting of public halls, offices, etc II, 64 
 
 photometers : II, 79 
 
 photometry II, 76 
 
 power distribution II, 46 
 
 residence lighting II, 56- 
 
 shades and reflectors II, 72 
 
 special lamps II ? 27 
 
 street lighting II, 67 
 
 Electric wiring I, 1-87 
 
 alternating-current circuits I, 40 
 
 alternating-current lines, drop in I, 44 
 
 concealed knob and tube wiring I, 13 
 
 conductors, calculation of sizes I, 25 
 
 methods of wiring I, 1 
 
 outlet-boxes, cut-out panels, and other accessories I, 63 
 
 overhead linework ; . I, 68 
 
 testing I, 36 
 
 two- wire and three-wire systems I, 20 
 
 underground linework I, 79 
 
 wires run concealed in conduits I, 1 
 
 wires run exposed on insulators I, 16 
 
 wires run in moulding I, 9 
 
 wiring installation I, 29 
 
 wiring an office building I, 54 
 
 English candle II, 76 
 
 F 
 
 Fibre conduit I, 83 
 
 Fibrous tubing . I, 15 
 
 Frosted globes II, 73 
 
 Fuse-boxes I, 66 
 
 G 
 
 Gem metallized filament lamp II, 12 
 
 German candle i II, 77 
 
INDEX iii 
 
 H 
 
 PART PAGE 
 
 Helion lamp 1I ? 21 
 
 Holophane globes n, 74 
 
 I 
 
 Illumination n, 53 
 
 intrinsic brightness II ? 54 
 
 irregular reflection n, 54 
 
 regular reflection n, 54 
 
 unit of II, 53 
 
 Incandescent lamp photometry n, 88 
 
 Incandescent lamps !' II, 2 
 
 comparison of types II ? 25 
 
 distribution of light II., H 
 
 efficiency II, 6 
 
 gem metallized filament lamp II, 12 
 
 helion lamp II, 21 
 
 manufacture of carbon incandescent lamps. II, 3 
 
 mean spherical candle-power II, 12 
 
 metallic filament lamps II, 14 
 
 Nernst lamp II, 21 
 
 selection of lamps II, 8 
 
 voltage and candle-power ( II, 5 
 
 Insulators I, 77 
 
 L 
 
 Light standards II, 76 
 
 amyl acetate lamp II, 77 
 
 carcel lamp II, 77 
 
 English candle II, 76 
 
 German candle II, 77 
 
 pentane lamp II, 77 
 
 working standards II, 78 
 
 Lighting of public halls, offices, etc II, 64 
 
 Lightning arresters I, 78 
 
 Lummer-Brodhun photometer II, 80 
 
 M 
 
 Mercury vapor lamp II, 27 
 
 Metal conduit, wires run in I, 4 
 
 Metallic filament lamps II, 14 
 
 Moore tube light II, 29 
 
 Mutual induction , , . . I, 42 
 
iv INDEX 
 
 N 
 
 PART PAGE 
 
 Nernst lamp II, 21 
 
 
 
 Opal enclosing globes II, 76 
 
 Osmium lamp II, 20 
 
 Outlet-boxes I, 63 
 
 Overhead Hnework I, 68 
 
 corners I, 75 
 
 cross-arms I, 75 
 
 insulators I, 77 
 
 lamps on poles I, 79 
 
 lightning arresters I, 78 
 
 pins I, 77 
 
 poles ' I, 70 
 
 guying of I, 72 
 
 placing of I, 69 
 
 service mains, pole wiring, etc I, 77 
 
 P 
 
 Pentane lamp II, 77 
 
 Photometers \ II, 79 
 
 integrating II, 86 
 
 Lummer-Brodhun II, 80 
 
 portable II, 85 
 
 Weber II, 83 
 
 Photometry II, 76 
 
 arc light II, 93 
 
 incandescent lamp II, 88 
 
 light standards II, 76 
 
 photometers II, 79 
 
 Poles I, 70 
 
 Polyphase circuits I, 53 
 
 Power distribution II, 46 
 
 multiple or parallel systems of distribution II, 51 
 
 multiple-series or series-multiple systems II, 51 
 
 multiple-wire systems II, 53 
 
 series system II, 46 
 
 E 
 
 Residence lighting II, 56 
 
 arrangement of lamps II, 59 
 
 calculation of illumination II, 56 
 
 plan of illumination II, 56 
 
 types of lamps II, 56 
 
 Rigid conduit, wires run in I, 1 
 
INDEX v 
 
 s 
 
 PART PAGE 
 
 Shades and reflectors H, 72 
 
 frosted globes II, 73 
 
 holophane globes II, 74 
 
 opal enclosing globes II, 76 
 
 Skin effect I, 42 
 
 Special lamps II, 27 
 
 mercury vapor lamp II, 27 
 
 Moore tube light II, 29 
 
 Street lighting II, 67 
 
 T 
 
 Table 
 
 absorption loss for different shades II, 72 
 
 arc lights per mile II, 70 
 
 armored conductors types, dimension, etc I, 8 
 
 change in voltage, effects of II, 8 
 
 conductors in fibrous conduit, sizes of I, 15 
 
 Cooper-Hewitt lamps - II, 65 
 
 drop in alternating-current lines, data for calculating. I, 47 
 
 efficiency of transmission of arc light globes II, 76 
 
 flaming arcs, general data on II, 46 
 
 gem metallized filament lamp data II, 12 
 
 Greenfield flexible steel conduit I, 5 
 
 illuminating data for meridian lamps II, 62 
 
 intrinsic brilliancies in candle-power per square inch . . II, 54 
 
 life of a 25 c. p. unit data II, 16 
 
 lighting data for arc lamps II, 66 
 
 melting point of some metals II, 21 
 
 Moore tube light data II, 32 
 
 mouldings, sizes of required for various sizes of con- 
 ductors I, 12 
 
 Nernst lamp data II, 25 
 
 photometric units II, 78 
 
 pole data I, 71 
 
 relative reflecting power II, 55 
 
 residence lighting data 4 II, 63 
 
 rigid, enameled conduit sizes, dimensions, etc I, 2 
 
 single wire in conduit I, 2 
 
 standard vitrified conduit I, 81 
 
 street-lamp data II, 71 
 
 tantalum lamp data II, 15 
 
 three wires in one conduit I, 3 
 
 tungsten lamps (multiple and series) II, 20 
 
 two wires in one conduit I, 
 
 Testing electric wiring I, 36 
 
vi INDEX 
 
 .... , i. 
 
 PART PAGE 
 
 Three-wire system,, details of -I, 22 
 
 Tungsten lamp II, 16 
 
 Two-wire and three-wire systems I, 20 
 
 details of three-wire system . . . . I, 22 
 
 relative advantages I, 20 
 
 U 
 
 Underground linework I ? 79 
 
 fibre conduit I, 83 
 
 iron pipe I, 80 . 
 
 laying of conduit I, 82 
 
 vitrified tile conduit I, 80 
 
 w 
 
 Weber photometer II, 83 
 
 Wires run concealed in conduits I, 1 
 
 armored cable I, 6 
 
 in flexible metal conduit I, 4 
 
 in rigid conduit . I, 1 
 
 Wires run exposed on insulators I, 16 
 
 accessibility I, 17 
 
 cheapness I, 16 
 
 durability I, 16 
 
 Wires run in mouldings I, 9 
 
 Wiring installation I., 29 
 
 feeders and mains. I, 36 
 
 location of outlets . I, 30 
 
 method of wiring I, 29 
 
 systems of wiring I, 30 
 
 Wiring an office building I, 54 
 
 basement . I, 55 
 
 character of load I, 55 
 
 electric current supply I, 54 
 
 feeders and mains I, 55 
 
 first floor I, 58 
 
 interconnection system I, 58 
 
 second floor I, 58 
 
 switchboard I, 55 
 
 upper floors I, 58 
 
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 
 
 WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
 THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
 WILL INCREASE TO 5O CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
 DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
 OVERDUE. 
 
 FEBs 
 
 MA? 10 ... 
 
 JUN 10 1941 
 
 '49' 
 
 *6 
 
 SEP 2 3 1952 UJ 
 
 1933 
 
 LD 21-50m-l,'3 
 
-o 
 
 
 YC 19518 
 
 346638 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY